List Film

MAC (Midlands Arts Centre)

Add to favourites
Cannon Hill Park, Birmingham, England, B12 9QH
Photo of MAC (Midlands Arts Centre)

1917

1917
  • 2019
  • UK / US
  • 1h 57min
  • Directed by: Sam Mendes
  • Cast: George MacKay, Dean-Charles Chapman, Mark Strong, Andrew Scott, Richard Madden, Claire Duburcq, Colin Firth, Benedict Cumberbatch

Lance Corporals Schofield (MacKay) and Blake (Chapman) are given the job of hand-delivering a message to another unit, across the mud and misery of the trenches. It suffers from simplistic dialogue and flat characterisation, but it’s visually impressive and a respectable, heartfelt tribute to the sacrifice of WWI.

Fri 24 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Sat 25 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Sun 26 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Mon 27 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Tue 28 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Wed 29 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Thu 30 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Art Appreciation (VA47 Spring)

An introduction to key periods in western art history for those who wish to gain an insight into important developments and discoveries in the world of art. You will then have the opportunity to produce practical work that relates to relevant topics to gain a better understanding of techniques and concepts. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people who have little or no knowledge or art history that wish to learn through research and practical exercises. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical craft activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course offers an introduction to key periods in western art history for those who wish to gain an insight into important developments and discoveries in the world of art. You will develop your understanding and theoretical knowledge of key art movements that may include Early and High Renaissance, Baroque, Impressionism, Expressionism, Cubism etc. You will have the opportunity to produce practical work that relates to relevant topics to gain a better understanding of techniques and concepts. This may include drawing, painting and collage. You will also keep a learning journal containing notes, images and information that provides context to the art works you are studying. Using a mix of tutor led talks, group discussion and practical demonstrations the tutor will support you in your learning and creation of practical studies, providing one-to-one support as required. On completion of this course you will have produced a detailed learning/visual journal and a selection of practical work. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a hardback, ringbound A4 sketchbook. Basic art materials will be provided but students will be expected to provide some of their own additional materials as the course progresses. There will also be access to free wifi so students are welcome to bring their own tablet or laptop devices for research. Are there any additional costs? Your sketchbook and any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney

Tue 21 Jan
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 28 Jan
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 4 Feb
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 11 Feb
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 25 Feb
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 3 Mar
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 10 Mar
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 17 Mar
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 24 Mar
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Tue 31 Mar
Weston Studio

£123 (£112)

Art Explorers (CH07 Spring)

From mask making to papier mache, costume making to painting, students are able to explore and experiment with many different materials. What will you learn on this course? On this course children will have the opportunity to experiment with a variety of different artistic materials, learn new creative techniques and develop their existing skills. They will work on a variety of projects, often around a theme such as Carnival, Sweet Shop, Fancy Dress or nature. The children are encouraged to work through many elements of the creative process such as generating ideas, designing and making prototypes before making their finished ‘product’. There is a range of artistic techniques taught on this course including felting, model making, costume making, Papier Mache, fabric dyeing, block printing, and weaving. Working both in groups and on individual projects encourages the students to develop confidence and team working skills. The course tutor demonstrates the art techniques, assists individuals with the development of their ideas and advises on how to create their final pieces of work. By the end of the course each child will have one large piece or a selection of smaller pieces of art work to take home. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years. It is open to all ability levels and children don’t need any previous experience. Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked.

The course is accessible for children with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? All course materials and equipment are provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who is this course is taught by? ILdiko Nagy

Sat 25 Jan
Weston Studio
Sat 1 Feb
Weston Studio
Sat 8 Feb
Weston Studio
Sat 15 Feb
Weston Studio
Sat 29 Feb
Weston Studio
Sat 7 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 14 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 21 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 28 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 4 Apr
Weston Studio

Art in Context (VA43 Spring)

A project-based class that encourages deeper research into a subject matter or artist that will inspire your creative thinking and develop your painting, drawing and mixed media skills. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners may be completely new to drawing and painting or may not have done it for some time. Improvers may have previously completed courses at mac or elsewhere and will benefit from an opportunity to develop their skills further. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? Develop your painting, drawing and mixed-media skills, and a better understanding of art history, through a project-based programme of classes. The projects will focus on developing a range of painting and drawing skills through studying an artist, style or movement in art history. While this theme may vary from term to term there will be an emphasis on discussion and research into the history and context of the project theme. You will be encouraged to informally share artistic and historical research you have undertaken to inform and broaden the scope of your projects. There is a whole-group review at the end of term and you will learn a great deal from other members of the group. The course will begin with whole-group discussions and demonstrations relevant to the project. Subsequent teaching will be one-to-one with students guided according to their own level of experience to help them to achieve their aims for their work. You will be encouraged to interpret the projects in your own way, informing your ideas with appropriate research. Depending on the project emphasis, students will usually complete several paintings and have supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research in their sketchbook and folder. You can also expect to have gained skills and confidence in painting and drawing and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. This is a two and a half hour class which includes an informal break. Do you need to bring anything? Basic materials will be provided but students will be expected to provide some of their own additional materials specific to their own project. There will also be access to free wifi but learners will need to bring their own ipad or laptop devices for research. We will also make use of the digital projector in the room. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Helen Tarr

Mon 20 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 27 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 3 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 10 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 24 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 2 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 9 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 16 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 23 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Mon 30 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

The Art of Computer Games (YP102 Spring)

Learn how to create art for computer games, learn how to draw and develop your characters and concepts in 2d and 3d.

What will you learn on this course?

This course will take you on a creative journey from paper to pixel exploring all the steps involved in taking a design idea from concept to realisation. You will learn techniques required to create your own characters and art assets for gaming. The course is taught by a professional comic and game artist who will introduce you to new skills including

Drawing and illustration skills storyboarding and narrative storytelling creating conceptual artwork using colour in your work 2D and 3D modelling Introduction to design software and equipment including drawing tablets.

This course is a great way to learn about team working and develop your communication, delegation and organisation skills. The tutor will work closely with the group supporting individual and team based projects.

On completing this course you can expect have a better understanding and greater appreciation of the subject and the confidence to go forward and produce your own pieces of work.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for young people aged 11-17 years. It is open to all ability levels and you don’t need previous animation experience as full instruction is given. If you do have some experience the course is designed for you to explore and learn new techniques to further develop your skills.

The course is accessible for young people of all abilities who can participate in practical art activities and use a computer. We provide a learning support worker and a carer or support worker may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything as all materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Jessica Taylor

Sat 25 Jan
Media Studio
Sat 1 Feb
Media Studio
Sat 8 Feb
Media Studio
Sat 15 Feb
Media Studio
Sat 29 Feb
Media Studio
Sat 7 Mar
Media Studio
Sat 14 Mar
Media Studio
Sat 21 Mar
Media Studio
Sat 28 Mar
Media Studio
Sat 4 Apr
Media Studio

Burns Night

Burns Night event in Cafe 19.30 - 23.00 Capacity 60 - Long trestle table set-up £25.00 per person - over 18 YO only Welcome drink 4 course dinner, banquet style Ode to the Haggis with a Dram of whiskey included Live entertainment

Cullen skink, soda bread n’ butter - Haggis, neaps, Tatties, whiskey sauce - Treacle tart with a lavender cream - Coffee, shortbread, deep fried mars bar Vegan and veggie options available (can we make this an option when booking)

Sat 25 Jan
Bridges Cafe

£25

Capoeira for Children (CH11 Spring)

Capoeira is an exciting Brazilian art form comprising martial arts, dance & acrobatics practiced to music. What will you learn on this course?

Capoeira is a fusion of Fitness, Acrobatics, Self-Defence, Dance and Music. It helps to develop:

confidence self-discipline respect physical fitness strength stamina flexibility balance coordination self-esteem creativity and learning

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 6 - 12 years open to beginners and improvers. The class is adapted to suit the needs of the participants and a fun way to learn new skills and techniques.

The course may be accessible for children with learning disabilities as we can provide a learning support worker however a certain amount of movement is required for this course and therefore less suitable for children with physical disabilities. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? Participants need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows them to move freely such as tracksuit bottoms/leggings and a close fitting t-shirt/vest top with a warmer top to put on after the session. Children will need pumps or trainers. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Vicky Hawkesford

Wed 22 Jan
Randle Studio
Wed 29 Jan
Randle Studio
Wed 5 Feb
Randle Studio
Wed 12 Feb
Randle Studio
Wed 26 Feb
Randle Studio
Wed 4 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 11 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 18 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 25 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 1 Apr
Randle Studio

Cats

Cats.
  • 2019
  • UK / US
  • 2h
  • PG
  • Directed by: Tom Hooper
  • Cast: James Corden, Judi Dench, Jason Derulo, Idris Elba, Jennifer Hudson, Ian McKellen, Taylor Swift, Rebel Wilson, Francesca Hayward

Victoria (Hayward) is a cat who find herself caught up with the tribe of the Jellicles, who are assembling to see which of them will ascend to the Heaviside Layer. For all the sheer vigour and professionalism of the performers, the ‘nakedness’ of the cats is unnerving and the end result is more flabbergasting than truly terrible.

Mon 20 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50 (Children £5)

Tue 21 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50 (Children £5)

Wed 22 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50 (Children £5)

Thu 23 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50 (Children £5)

Ceramic Forms: Natural Inspiration (CE03 Spring)

This course will cover basic techniques such as thumb pot, coiling and slab building using natural forms and patterns as inspiration. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling and slab building. Decorative techniques will be also taught, introducing textures, coloured slip decoration, glazing techniques and the firing process. This course will also cover the history of ceramics and examine how different cultures have used clay and the decorative process, placing this in context with contemporary approaches. Taking inspiration from the natural forms of plants and animals, you will be taught how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Tue 21 Jan
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 25 Feb
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 3 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Ceramic Forms: Natural Inspiration (CE89 Spring)

This course will cover basic techniques such as thumb pot, coiling and slab building using natural forms and patterns as inspiration. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling and slab building. Decorative techniques will be also taught, introducing textures, coloured slip decoration, glazing techniques and the firing process. This course will also cover the history of ceramics and examine how different cultures have used clay and the decorative process, placing this in context with contemporary approaches. Taking inspiration from the natural forms of plants and animals, you will be taught how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Tue 21 Jan
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 25 Feb
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 3 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Pottery Studio

£175.50 (£160.50)

Ceramic Portraiture & Figurative Sculpture (SC02 Spring)

Working directly from a life model, explore traditional and contemporary ways to sculpt the human figure in clay. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous sculpting experience as full tuition is give. This course is perfect for students interested in the human form and learning to sculpt it in clay. Improvers may have attended mac’s Figurative Sculpture beginners course or similar courses elsewhere and will be able to refine their technique and create new work. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with the clay and the tools. Students may bring their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? An ideal class for those interested in learning to sculpt the human figure. You will have the opportunity to model in clay from a nude life model, usually holding the same pose for the full duration of the course. The first task set is to produce a scale model of a full figure and finish it so that it can be fired in the kiln. On this course students will get a flavour of the challenges of working in clay and translating the human figure into a successful clay sculpture. You will learn to develop your observational skills and gain an understanding of scale and proportion. You will be taught clay modelling techniques using an assortment of tools and equipment and how to prepare your finished sculpture for firing in the kiln. Both buff and terracotta clay is available. Improvers will be able to refine their skills and be encouraged to approach their work in new ways e.g. isolating parts of the body to sculpt and developing more personal representations of form. We aim to rotate models across classes and terms so that improvers should be able to work from a different subject than on a previous course. Coming on this course is a great way to experience working with other like-minded people in a relaxed studio environment. By the end of the course you should have a finished model that will then be fired for you to take home. Please note the clay must dry out before firing so your model will be available to collect 4-5 weeks later. There is a short break in the middle of each class. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? Each student is allocated a fixed amount of clay to work with. If you want to produce work that uses more than this it will be at an extra cost. Roughly £7 per large bag of clay. Who teaches this course? Barbara Pianca

Tue 21 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 28 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 4 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 11 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 25 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 3 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 10 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 17 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 24 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 31 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Ceramic Sculpture (SC04 Spring)

A ceramic sculpture course where you will learn to realise your own ideas with clay and other contemporary materials. What will you learn on this course? This course will teach contemporary techniques in creating 3D sculptural artworks from clay and other materials. Taking inspiration from a range of sculptural styles, techniques and artists, students will be supported to develop their own ideas for a sculpture project. You may choose to create work that is figurative, representational or abstract and you can work with a wide range of materials including ceramics, wax, papier-mâché, felt, plaster, fabric, mixed media etc. The tutor will guide you through the process of creating the work including: • Researching and developing your ideas • Producing drawings and designs • Visualising 3D forms • Construction techniques • Understanding the properties of materials and how to work with them • Choosing the most appropriate medium • Finishing techniques including ceramic decoration and firing. You will learn to develop your observational and representational skills and gain an understanding of scale, proportion and mass. The tutor will demonstrate techniques and materials and provide one-to-one support on your individual project. Coming on this course is a great way to experience working with other like-minded people in a relaxed studio environment. By the end of the course you should have a finished sculpture made to your own design. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. You don’t need any previous sculpting experience as full tuition is give. This course is perfect for students interested in learning how to realise their own sculptural projects in clay and other media. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands. Students may bring their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment is provided. You should bring any images, objects, materials, sketchbooks that might inspire your work. Are there any additional costs? Each student is allocated a fixed amount of clay and basic materials to work with. If you want to produce work that uses more than this it will be at an extra cost. Roughly £7 per large bag of clay plus a small additional to cost to fire. You are welcome to bring other specialist materials in consultation with the tutor. Who teaches this course? Barbara Pianca

Tue 21 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 28 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 4 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 11 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 25 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 3 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 10 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 17 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 24 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 31 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Ceramics: Introduction to Handbuilding (CE14 Spring)

Explore the versatility of clay as a material, through traditional handbuilding techniques such as coiling, slabwork and press moulding. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginner level students. What will you learn on this course? You will be guided through a number of tutor-led demos and set tasks which will introduce particular tips and techniques in order for you to create a range of pieces. The course will cover the following skills and techniques: • how to successfully develop 2d designs into 3d objects • construction techniques • understanding of the materials and different stages of making • options for design, building, and quality of finish • slip decoration and imprinted texture • brush on glazing In addition there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. You are encouraged to develop your own ideas within the parameters of creating slab pots with surface decoration. Use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged throughout this course, to enable the development of ideas, and of the student’s own working style. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, glazes, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques for the realisation of your own design. Accessibility The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Mon 20 Jan
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 27 Jan
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 3 Feb
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 10 Feb
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 24 Feb
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 2 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 9 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 16 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 23 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Mon 30 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Ceramics Workshop (CE07 Spring)

Develop and broaden your knowledge of ceramics through set exercises and demonstrations. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or carer may assist and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will have the opportunity to broaden your knowledge of ceramics by completing a series of set exercises. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of hand building techniques such as throwing, coiling, and slab building. Surface treatments in clay can also be considered such as relief details and engraved pattern work. Demonstrations on the use of coloured slips and various glazing techniques such as dipping, pouring and spraying will allow for further experimentation in the final stages of the decorating process. You will be encouraged to explore and experiment with each technique to produce a collection of ceramic pieces. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of a collection of work. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Wed 22 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 29 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 5 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 12 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 26 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 4 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 11 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 18 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 25 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 1 Apr
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Colour Your Cloth (TE102 Spring)

This new course is designed for those ‘dyeing’ to experiment with dyes and explore interesting and varied dyeing techniques. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people who are both completely new to textiles and those who wish to learn new approaches to dyeing and develop their skills further. Accessibility What will you learn on the course? Participants will create a collection of unique samples of beautiful coloured cloth, which can be used for projects at home or on other textile courses to stitch, quilt, print etc. The term will cover a wide variety of dyeing techniques to create colour and pattern on fabric and threads using various dyes, resists, discharges, over-dyeing and more. Techniques we will explore- Tie-dyeing Dip dyeing Space dyeing Indigo dyeing Natural dyeing with vegetables Eco dyeing using plants Ice or snow dyeing Marbling Rust dyeing Cyanotype Batik Japanese Chusen dyeing Do you need to bring anything? All tools, materials, dyeing recipes and printed instructions will be provided. It is advisable to wear old clothes and bring a suitable apron/ old shirt to protect you and some plastic bags to transport any wet samples safely home. Are there any additional costs? Please bring a sketchbook and notebook to record your work. Who teaches this course? Helen Lane

Wed 22 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 29 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 5 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 12 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 26 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 4 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 11 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 18 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 25 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 1 Apr
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Coloured Clays, Porcelain and Basic Mould Making (CE101 Spring)

Use coloured clays and porcelain to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, applique, inlay and layering. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to learn new techniques or work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also learn basic mould making techniques such as press moulds and multiple piece moulds. Initially moulds will be cast from found objects but you will also have the opportunity to design your own mould shapes. You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Fri 24 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 31 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 7 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 14 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 28 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 6 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 13 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 20 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 27 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 3 Apr
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Coloured Clays, Porcelain and Basic Mould Making (CE95 Spring)

Use coloured clays and porcelain to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, applique, inlay and layering. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to learn new techniques or work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also learn basic mould making techniques such as press moulds and multiple piece moulds. Initially moulds will be cast from found objects but you will also have the opportunity to design your own mould shapes. You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Fri 24 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 31 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 7 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 14 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 28 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 6 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 13 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 20 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 27 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Fri 3 Apr
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Constructing Form and Surface Decoration (CE11 Spring)

A course for experienced ceramics students to develop hand building construction techniques and explore surface decoration through pattern and texture. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. Learners will be introduced to this subject whilst Improvers and advanced students will be guided in their projects, The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course offers experienced ceramics students the opportunity to develop your construction techniques through hand building, and explore the relationship of surface decoration through pattern and texture. You will have the opportunity to use a variety of techniques, including sgraffito, paper resist and in-relief modelling. The course will cover the following skills and techniques: Recording and documenting of ideas Development of 2d designs into 3d objects Construction techniques Visualising the 3D form Surface decorating techniques Creating precise repeat patterns Compositional aesthetic History of ceramic art context Brush on glazing In addition, there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. You are encouraged to develop your own ideas within the parameters of creating hand-built pots with surface decoration. Use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged throughout this course, to enable the development of ideas, and of the student’s own working style. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, glazes, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques for the realisation of your own design for a hand-built pot with surface decoration. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Wed 22 Jan
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 29 Jan
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 5 Feb
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 12 Feb
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 26 Feb
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 4 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 11 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 18 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 25 Mar
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Wed 1 Apr
Pottery Studio

£176 (£160)

Contemporary Ceramics (CE94 Spring)

Explore and experiment with exciting ceramic processes that will teach you to realise your own design ideas in ceramic. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults and young people aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? In these weekly two hour classes you will explore and experiment with a variety of clay working processes that will take you on a journey through the construction, decoration and realisation of your design ideas in ceramic. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of hand building techniques such as throwing, coiling and slab building, which you can choose to use by combining these processes or simply focusing on a chosen method that suits your design. You will also learn how to apply surface treatments in clay such as relief details and engraved pattern work that can be used to decorate your work. An introduction to the use of coloured slips, glazes and various glaze techniques and approaches will allow for further experimentation in the final stages of the decorating process. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical skills and techniques in ceramics through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Thu 23 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 9 Apr
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Contemporary Dance (DA09 Spring)

An introductory class with an emphasis on the Cunningham technique which is designed to create strength and flexibility of movement. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers and the class will be adapted to suit the needs of the participants. For those with more experience the technique will be made harder and for beginners full instruction is given and the movement routines will be simplified. The course is accessible for people with disabilities providing you are physically able to dance. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Contemporary Dance is a high impact physical activity. You need a good level of physical fitness but the course is also a good way to improve your overall fitness levels. If you have any health conditions you should consult your doctor before joining this class. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn contemporary dance technique establishing a technical base while nurturing your creative skills. This is a technique class based on learning short exercises and phrases of movement that will progress and increase in content over the term. There will be opportunities to explore partner work and simple group work. You will improve your body and spatial awareness, develop your confidence as a dancer and have opportunities for self-expression through improvisation. There is also a short creative element to the course which the tutor will guide participants through giving you an understanding of a creative devising process. Do you need to bring anything? Participants will need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the session. Lessons are usually done bare footed but on occasion socks may be required. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Helen Mason

Mon 20 Jan
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 27 Jan
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 3 Feb
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 10 Feb
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 24 Feb
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 2 Mar
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 9 Mar
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 16 Mar
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 23 Mar
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 30 Mar
Performance Studio

£107 (£98)

Contemporary Portraiture (VA13 Spring)

Working directly from a life model, explore traditional and contemporary portraiture. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open students of all levels. Everyone will be assisted individually based on their existing experience. It is expected that most students will have some general experience of drawing, even if they are beginners at portraiture. However this course can be used as a refresher for basic drawing techniques with reference to a portrait model. Returners are welcome to initiate their own projects with tutor support and feedback as required. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This is a flexible course for students interested in contemporary approaches to drawing and painting portraits. You will learn drawing and painting skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone and colour. You will have the opportunity to explore the use of different art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, acrylic paint and watercolour. You will work directly from a clothed professional life model. There are usually two models to choose from who will hold a single pose set up by the artist tutor. We employ a range of different male and female models for our life drawing and painting courses. We usually have the same models sit for two consecutive weeks. The artist tutor gives each student individual attention, according to their experience, aptitude and specific goals, supporting them to find their own creative direction. For beginners, and others who wish to follow it, there is a weekly structured course consisting of group projects. The tutor will demonstrate a basic art material technique, show examples of his own or other artists work and support students as they try the technique themselves. Students may also spend time developing a particular approach. More experienced students, or those returning to the course, are welcome to undertake their own projects with the knowledge that a professional artist tutor is available to offer input and support in reaching your goals. These sessions are an excellent opportunity to further your individual drawing and painting in response to a life model, gaining an insight into how the human form can be a fascinating ongoing topic for artistic study in its own right. This class includes a short break. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Thu 23 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Creative Drama (CH05 Spring)

Unlock your creative imagination and explore a wide variety of drama techniques including improvisation, movement and voice. What will you learn on this course?

On this weekly course, children will learn how their ideas can be transformed into a piece of theatre. Through various theatre games and exercises young people will develop their confidence, creativity, group work, speaking, listening and performance and presentation skills.

Each term a theme is chosen and the group will create performance material inspired by this theme. The students will be taught aspects of devising, acting, rhythm, movement and voice. The tutor works closely with the group providing a stimulus for the playful exploration of ideas. The children’s ideas are then adapted and directed during rehearsals to form the foundation of an end of term performance.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 5 to 9 years. It is open to beginners and improvers levels. Beginners will be introduced to a range of drama techniques and processes and improvers will have the opportunity to develop their existing skills and increase their confidence as performers.

Parents are not expected to accompany children on this course. All our staff are DBS checked.

Elements of this class are quite physically demanding. The course may be accessible for children with disabilities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your particular needs.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? Participants should bring bottled water or a water based drink. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who is this course is taught by? Hailey Brown

Sat 25 Jan
Randle Studio
Sat 1 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 8 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 15 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 29 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 7 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 14 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 21 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 28 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 4 Apr
Randle Studio

Creative Writing Beginners (WR10 Spring)

A creative writing short course for beginners or those with low confidence. Supported by tutor Carol Preston, you'll use writing techniques to generate ideas and explore some of the genres in creative writing that you can choose to take home and develop further or share wider. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. Previous experience in creative writing is not required as full instruction will be given. This course is also suitable for anyone who lacks confidence in their writing or hasn’t written creatively for a while. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course is designed to kick-start you into writing creatively. You will be taught how to generate material using writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering. By examining of the work of published writers you will learn about techniques such as: Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation You will be encouraged to develop some of these techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback. By the end of the course everyone will have several pieces of their own writing which have been generated in response to tutor topics and techniques along with hand-outs on these topics for further consideration and development. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 20 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 27 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 3 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 10 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 24 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 2 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 9 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 16 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 23 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 30 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Creative Writing Beginners (WR105 Spring)

A creative writing short course for beginners or those with low confidence. Supported by tutor Carol Preston, you'll use writing techniques to generate ideas and explore some of the genres in creative writing that you can choose to take home and develop further or share wider. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. Previous experience in creative writing is not required as full instruction will be given. This course is also suitable for anyone who lacks confidence in their writing or hasn’t written creatively for a while. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course is designed to kick-start you into writing creatively. You will be taught how to generate material using writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering. By examining of the work of published writers you will learn about techniques such as: Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation You will be encouraged to develop some of these techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback. By the end of the course everyone will have several pieces of their own writing which have been generated in response to tutor topics and techniques along with hand-outs on these topics for further consideration and development. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Tue 21 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 25 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 3 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£97.50 (£89.50)

Creative Writing Improvers (WR11 Spring)

Advance your writing, re-drafting and editing skills whilst gaining an understanding of how to become your own self-critic for continued development. Who is this course for? This short course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers. Previous experience of creative writing is required. You may have attended mac’s Creative Writing Beginners course or a similar course elsewhere. This course may also be suitable for those working in a creative environment such as marketing or advertising agencies. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course is aimed at existing writers who are engaged in creative writing activities, creating new work or developing existing projects. By examining of the work of published writers we will look at the following techniques in depth: Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation This will include consideration of in-depth character, motives, conflict and the examination of themes in writing. There will also be a focus on the re-drafting and editing process, crucial to all writers. Learners will develop an understanding of how to become their own self-critic and appreciate that writing is a process for continued development. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback. By the end of the course everyone will have a small portfolio of their own writing which can be extended, re-drafted and edited for their own purposes. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 20 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 27 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 3 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 10 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 24 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 2 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 9 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 16 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 23 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 30 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Culture Club: First Birthday

Join us for a celebration of one year of Culture Club! A session in which we’ll reflect on our year together and make plans for 2020. Refreshments included.

Members booking opens as soon as we can! Public booking from 13 January 2020.

Mon 20 Jan
Hexagon

Dance for Fitness & Wellbeing (DA27 Spring)

Get your week off to a good start dancing and moving for improved health and wellbeing. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginner. You do not need previous dance experience as full instruction is given and the class will be adapted to suit the needs of the participants. Unfortunately this course is not accessible for people with disabilities. Students should inform the tutor of any existing injuries and we recommend you consult your doctor before starting any new form of exercise. What will you learn on this course? This course teaches dance and movement for improved health and wellbeing. You will learn stretching and strengthening exercises, improvisation and creative devising tasks in an energising and fun weekly one-hour class. Through a series of exercises and tasks you will develop a deeper understanding of how the body works and improve your movement range. You will strengthen your core muscle groups and increase your postural awareness. The class will also include structured tasks and improvisations designed to nurture your creative skills and help you create simple phrases of movement including working with a partner. You will build your creative confidence and understanding of the creative process leading to a sense of achievement and wellbeing through a stronger more creative body. Do you need to bring anything? Participants will need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the session. Lessons are done bare footed. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Helen Mason

Mon 20 Jan
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 27 Jan
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 3 Feb
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 10 Feb
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 24 Feb
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 2 Mar
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 9 Mar
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 16 Mar
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 23 Mar
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Mon 30 Mar
Performance Studio

£105 (£96)

Dance For Wellbeing (DA25 Spring)

A weekly dance class for older adults who want to start dancing and moving for improved health and wellbeing.

What will you learn on this course? This fun weekly course will focus on contemporary dance and improvised movement techniques as well as providing some time to socialise and meet new people. This course should contribute to improvements in your general fitness and wellbeing including: General mobility Core strength Posture and alignment Confidence Wellbeing The class will include an improvised warm up followed by technique exercises. There will be the opportunity to improvise your own movement finding positions and shapes that suit your body and ability. There will also be the chance to work creatively with other members of the group.

The tutor will nurture a supportive and social environment for the class, encouraging and challenging based on individual’s abilities and needs. The class will include some social time with refreshments.

On completing this course you should feel able to be more confidently agile in your everyday lives, have greater motivation for exercise and improved sense of wellbeing.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 40+ years who would like to spend time socialising and learning to dance. It is open to all levels. Suitable for complete beginners who have never stepped foot on a dance floor to those who have a little experience and would like to learn more. Everyone will be encouraged to participate at their own pace.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities. A support worker or carer may assist and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Any health issues should be declared by participants at the start of the course and will be taken into consideration by the tutor. Exercises will be adapted where necessary and chairs will be available for participants to rest if needed. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear suitable clothing that allows free movement and shoes with a non-slip sole. Also bring a water based drink.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Sandra Golding

Wed 22 Jan
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 29 Jan
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 5 Feb
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 12 Feb
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 26 Feb
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 4 Mar
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 11 Mar
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 18 Mar
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 25 Mar
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Wed 1 Apr
English Studio

£105 (£96)

Drama For Wellbeing (WB27 Spring)

Learn performance and relaxation techniques designed to develop your confidence in creativity and self-expression.

What will you learn on this course?

The course will cover a wide range of performance and relaxation techniques that will be taught in a safe and supportive environment. It is designed to develop your confidence in creativity and self-expression. The tutor will work with the group and one-to-one to develop appropriate techniques and skills.

Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all who feel they need to improve their wellbeing and you don’t require any previous drama experience.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring water and wear loose comfortable clothes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Kirsty Mitchell

Wed 22 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 29 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 5 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 12 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 26 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 4 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 11 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 18 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 25 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Wed 1 Apr
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Drawing & Painting Nature (VA84 Spring)

Using a mixture of media develop your own themes based on observation of natural forms within still–life, figure and mac Birmingham's surrounding landscape. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners may be completely new to drawing and painting or may not have done it for some time. They will be offered an introduction to drawing and painting methods. Improvers and advanced students may have previously completed courses at mac or elsewhere and will benefit from an opportunity for further development. They may wish to respond to tutor led activities or initiate their own nature themed projects with tutor support and feedback as required. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course ‘nature’ is the starting point to stimulate curiosity and creativity while learning about drawing and painting. Through the use of direct observation and strategies for gathering reference, you will learn skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, monochrome, limited palette and full colour. You will have the opportunity to explore the use of different art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, acrylic paint, watercolour and mixed media. You will work directly from natural subjects provided by the tutor or by members of the class. Topics of study derived from these subjects may include: flowers and plants, fruit, vegetables, shells, pebbles, trees, roots, windfall branches, clouds, landscape, water, birds, animals, shadows, portrait, life drawing etc. Cannon Hill Park may also be used as a resource along with images of work by other artists. This structured course consists mainly of two week projects on each nature topic, although students may linger longer on any aspect that they wish, and some are designed to overlap. The content evolves from term to term in response to student feedback. The topics are introduced by the tutor with examples of his own or other artist’s work and practical demonstrations. Each student will receive individual attention according to their experience and need, supporting them to develop a practical understanding of art materials and a greater appreciation of aspects of nature. Advanced students are invited to participate in group projects where they wish or have tutor assistance with developing their own individual projects inspired by nature. This course aims to offer a relaxed environment, conducive to quiet concentration where students can progress with their individual creative journey. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Tue 21 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 25 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 3 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Drawing, Comics and Animation for Young People (YP103 Spring)

Learn how to design and create your own comic characters and story, learn drawing skills and work with 2D animation to bring your characters to life.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to create your own comics, short visual stories, characters and animation.

The course will cover

• Drawing skills and techniques • Character design and concepts • Creating stories and storyboards • Animation techniques such as stop motion and hand drawn animation • Pencilling and inking • Digital colouring and lettering

By exploring and studying a range of comics you will learn to understand different stylistic approaches and artistic techniques.

You will be taught how to interpret the written word into imagery and to communicate stories effectively.

The course will also consider different layouts and formats for presenting your comic including conventional comic strips, art style and display or fan art.

You will be guided through the process of creating concept art for characters and developing these in your comic. This course combines traditional pen and paper drawing skills with digital techniques and the use of comic layout software.

On completion of this course you can expect to have gained an understanding of a range of approaches to creating comics and produced your own comic art works and animation.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for young people aged 11-17 years. It is open to beginners and improvers so you don’t need previous art experience as full instruction is given. If you do have some experience the course is designed for you to explore and learn new techniques to further develop your skills.

The course is accessible for young people of all abilities who can participate in practical art activities and use a computer. We provide a learning support worker and a carer or support worker may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything as all materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Fri 24 Jan
Media Studio
Fri 31 Jan
Media Studio
Fri 7 Feb
Media Studio
Fri 14 Feb
Media Studio
Fri 28 Feb
Media Studio
Fri 6 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 13 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 20 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 27 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 3 Apr
Media Studio

Drawing Techniques (VA03 Spring)

Develop your drawing and observational skills while exploring the art of working with graphite pencils, charcoal pencils, pastel pencils and coloured/water soluble pencils. It is an opportunity to try things out that can give satisfaction for many years to come. Students are encouraged to return to the same course so they can take each technique further. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is designed for students who wish to improve their drawing techniques and skills. Students with some previous drawing experience will benefit from this course and it is suitable for those wishing to start from simple beginnings, then accumulatively put together more techniques as the course progresses. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This is a structured course that will guide you through the use of a range of pencils such as graphite pencils, charcoal pencils, pastel pencils and coloured/water soluble pencils. You will gain drawing skills in line, tone, form and colour along with measurement of proportions. You will work with a variety of intriguing subject matter chosen to facilitate specific learning goals of individual lessons. These will include; • direct observation still-life • natural forms • a life model • a portrait model • and a number of experimental projects to tap into your creative imagination. This course focusses on learning by art practice. Each week the tutor will set a specific project. He will demonstrate a basic technique supported by completed examples of artist’s work. Students will then undertake a practical exercise to learn and apply the technique themselves with individual support and guidance from the tutor. Each lesson builds on the previous one, gradually developing your skills and understanding. On completing this course you can expect to have a range of drawings of different subjects demonstrating your understanding of basic drawing techniques and the use of different types of pencil. This course aims to offer a relaxed environment, conducive to informal conversation and quiet concentration where students can progress with their individual creative journey. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners. Students are encouraged to bring their own objects and still life and you may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Mon 20 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 27 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 3 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 10 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 24 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 2 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 9 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 16 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 23 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Mon 30 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£132.50 (£121.50)

Dru Yoga (WB15 Spring)

Dru Yoga is deeply relaxing, yet rejuvenating. Made up of sequences ranging from soft and flowing to more dynamic and containing classic yoga postures, it's a style of yoga that integrates movement, breath-work, an appreciation of subtle energy and directed intention to integrate our body, mind and spirit.

What you will learn on this course Dru Yoga is deeply relaxing, yet rejuvenating. Made up of sequences ranging from soft and flowing to more dynamic and containing classic yoga postures, it's a style of yoga that integrates movement, breath-work, an appreciation of subtle energy and directed intention to integrate our body, mind and spirit.

It works well for improving fitness, strength and flexibility and can bring a positive change to our thinking. It also re-balances and uplifts our emotions!

Dru Yoga classes are renowned for their empowering atmosphere. Students are supported to practice postures and perform sequences in a safe and supportive way respecting their own body and the alignment points described during the class. Classes aim to give students a warm inner certainty that they’re in charge of their life and health!

Key elements that make up a Dru Yoga class:

• A class starts with activations that help students to let go, release tension and warm the body up • Flowing sequences to increase flexibility and the flow of energy through our body; sequences range from gentle to more dynamic • Asana/ posture work introducing students to ‘classic’ yoga postures and deepening practice for more experienced students; students are advised of contraindications and modifications to practice safely and to experience the positive benefits of yoga • A guided relaxation at the end of each class • Students may be invited to make short ‘journal’ notes at the end of each class to support their progression towards the benefits they’re hoping to gain from attending.

Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ and is open to students of all levels. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice or try a new style of yoga.

All students will need to complete a Dru Yoga Health Questionnaire before attending the first class. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat.

Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) must be provided at your own expense. These are readily available online or from sports shops.

Who teaches this course? Liz Winchurch

Thu 23 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 30 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 6 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 13 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 20 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 27 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 5 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 12 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 19 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 26 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 2 Apr
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Every Voice: Come and Sing Day

A day of singing workshops for families with children who identify as disabled or with additional needs. Join us for a get-together of like-minded singers - no previous experience required. Sing a mixture of old favourites and help us write a song together. We are inclusive and welcoming to those who use different or non-verbal forms of communication. Sessions are free. Book on to one or both.

Sat 25 Jan

Explore Ceramics: Clay, Porcelain & Mould Making (CE102 Spring)

Develop your ceramic skills, explore stone, clay, porcelain and mould making techniques. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is for improvers and advanced practitioners seeking to develop and build on their skills working with an experienced tutor. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also build on mould making techniques using found objects or design your own mould shapes. You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Thu 23 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Sculpture Studion

£183.50 (£167.50)

Explore Feltmaking (TE01 Spring)

An introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool to create functional and decorative pieces. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of felt making as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills, technique and develop new designs. This course involves working at low tables, includes long periods of standing and good dexterity is needed in your hands. The course may not be suitable for people with disabilities but you may contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. A carer or support worker may assist but must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. What will you learn on this course? This course is an introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool. You will be taught the skills to create tactile surfaces for stitch and dye, plus more advanced techniques including resists and nuno felting to develop functional and decorative pieces. On this course you will learn how to: • Understand the properties of wool and appreciate how and why it felts • Create 2D felt using traditional wet rolling technique • Layout wool and calculate shrinkage for wet rolling felt • Identify and work with a range of animal, plant and man-made fibres • Use colour, create pattern and ‘paint’ with the wool • Create and use pre-felt • Incorporate threads, fibres and fabric into the felt to create decorative surfaces • Make and use resists to create seamless felt The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. Students will be provided with handouts for each technique and will build a personal portfolio of samples to refer to for future felting projects. The course content is guided by the ability and prior experience of the students attending. Students wishing to re-enrol are welcomed and assisted to develop their skills further and work on individual projects with guided support from the tutor. Previously students have made wall hangings, bags, cushions, bowls, hats, jewellery, flowers and scarves. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron. All materials and equipment are provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Mon 20 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 27 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 3 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 10 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 24 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 2 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 9 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 16 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 23 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 30 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Explore Feltmaking (TE21 Spring)

An introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool to create functional and decorative pieces. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of felt making as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills, technique and develop new designs. This course involves working at low tables, includes long periods of standing and good dexterity is needed in your hands. The course may not be suitable for people with disabilities but you may contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. A carer or support worker may assist but must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. What will you learn on this course? This course is an introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool. You will be taught the skills to create tactile surfaces for stitch and dye, plus more advanced techniques including resists and nuno felting to develop functional and decorative pieces. On this course you will learn how to: • Understand the properties of wool and appreciate how and why it felts • Create 2D felt using traditional wet rolling technique • Layout wool and calculate shrinkage for wet rolling felt • Identify and work with a range of animal, plant and man-made fibres • Use colour, create pattern and ‘paint’ with the wool • Create and use pre-felt • Incorporate threads, fibres and fabric into the felt to create decorative surfaces • Make and use resists to create seamless felt The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. Students will be provided with handouts for each technique and will build a personal portfolio of samples to refer to for future felting projects. The course content is guided by the ability and prior experience of the students attending. Students wishing to re-enrol are welcomed and assisted to develop their skills further and work on individual projects with guided support from the tutor. Previously students have made wall hangings, bags, cushions, bowls, hats, jewellery, flowers and scarves. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron. All materials and equipment are provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Tue 21 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 28 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 4 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 11 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 25 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 3 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 10 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 17 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 24 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Tue 31 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Explore Photomontage

Learn about photomontage, the art of creating designs from found images. Create your own handcrafted designs while unwinding and socialising with others.

What will you learn on this course?

This course offers the opportunity to develop skills in the creation of hand generated photomontage, which is an art form with historic roots in the Dadaist movement of 1915. Photomontage is the art of using existing photographs, cut from used books and magazines, in order to create new designs. The process of producing photomontage by hand, (as opposed to using computer software), is very satisfying and therapeutic, providing a more immediate, raw aesthetic to the finished artwork. On this course you will learn how to:

Understand how Photomontage fits into the overall history of art. Use mindmaps to convey emotion in the creation of photomontage. Use scale, proportion and geometry to maximise the visual impact of your designs. Use colour, texture and typography to maximise the visual impact of your designs. Use and refine craft skills in the creation of photomontage designs by hand.

The tutor will provide a variety of magazines and image rich books giving you the opportunity to create a range of alternative visual outcomes. Different design formats will also be touched upon during the course. Montage designs will be applied to post card sized artwork and A3 posters, with suggested themes for designs, or your own choice of topic.

The class includes group tuition, handouts and one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. The tutor will encourage an atmosphere of communication and co-operation through interactions with others in the class.

The course will include time to view, reflect and constructively critique your own work and that of other students in the class, done in a friendly and relaxed environment. The overall aim of the course is to help learners develop their own original style of producing art via the medium of photomontage, whilst enjoying the therapy of losing 'the self' in the creative experience.

On completion of this course you can expect to have produced several rough ideas pieces and refined finished artworks.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels and you do not require any previous art experience, full instruction will be given.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical art activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment is provided however we’d encourage you to please bring along old magazines and unwanted books with pictures and illustrations. Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs.

Who teaches this course? Hazel Pitt

Sun 16 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£40 (£37)

Sun 22 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£40 (£37)

Explore Textiles (TE02 Spring)

A practical introduction to designing and making textiles using a range of techniques such as batik, screenprinting and feltmaking. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners so you don’t need any previous experience of textile making as full instruction and guidance is given. This course is a great introduction to essential textiles techniques. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course involves working at low tables and includes long periods of standing. You need good manual dexterity. Some of the processes involve melting paraffin wax and the fumes may cause breathing difficulties for asthmatics however extractor fans and ventilation will be used. What will you learn on this course? On this termly course you will be given a practical introduction to designing and making textiles. Using a variety of materials and techniques such as batik, screen printing, felt making and embroidery with elements of paper making and dyeing, you will be encouraged to realise your own designs, developing a number of personal projects with the support of your tutor. You will learn the following techniques and processes: Batik: You will learn to identify different types of wax, the use of tools to apply wax, how to apply wax resist, what surfaces to work on, how to work with cold water reactive dyes, methods to remove wax, scrafitto, traditional dip dye, methods to develop depth of colour, how to translate design ideas to batik. Screenprinting: You will learn how to prepare a design, create a stencil and use the print screen, squeegee and ink to print your design. Colour separation and repeat printing will be explored as well as learning how to mix inks and binder and fix prints. You will also learn mono printing with Procion dyes. Feltmaking: You will learn how to layout wool, create a design using wet felting technique and how to needle felt a simple shape. Silk Paper Making: You will learn how to layout silk fibres and add other fibres, yarns and objects to make paper. Machine Embroidery: You will learn how to thread and set up a sewing machine to draw with thread using free motion embroidery. You can then apply this technique on fabric and paper. Sewing skills: You will learn hand sewing skills to transform your textile pieces into functional items. By the end of this course you will have produced a number of textile samples and your own individual projects, understanding how to translate your design ideas into completed work. You will have developed your understanding of a range of textile techniques, learning which you prefer, and have the confidence to work independently. Previous students have made wall hangings, textile paintings, bowls, printed t- shirts, bags, window blinds, cards, cushion covers and book jackets. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron and an A4 or larger ring bound sketchbook and/or plastic wallet to record what you learn and keep your samples in. You may wish to bring along a few of your chosen designs to get you started. You are welcome to bring along your own materials and fabric to print on, for example t-shirts, bags or tea towels. Most materials and all equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? You will need to provide the items listed above at your own expense. Ring bound scrapbook approx. £8.50. Apron approx. £5.00 Most materials required for this course are included in the course fee. Specialist items such as silk fabric may incur small additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Mon 20 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 27 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 3 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 10 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 24 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 2 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 9 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 16 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 23 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 30 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Exploring Experimental Film Making (DM105 Spring)

Through screenings, discussion and practical film projects, this 12 week course is a deep dive into the alternative world of experimental film and video making, where narrative and drama may still exist but not quite as we know them from traditional cinema. What will you learn on this course? The first half of term is a chronological history of 'avant garde' cinema, with screenings of a diverse selection of experimental films - from classic shorts, animations and video art through to the modern era of experimental music videos, installations and You Tube wonders. Post-screening discussions will hopefully inspire and provoke you into new ways of seeing the moving image, with occasional guests dropping by to join the conversation including festival producers, cinema producers, academics and experimental filmmakers.

You will receive one free ticket to a MAC cinema screening as part of the course price.

The second half of term is practical - participants will learn about devising and writing a short experimental film treatment, and plan and shoot their own footage either as individuals or in groups. There will be sessions on experimenting with DSLR cameras, trying out 360* filmmaking using an Insta360 camera and VR headsets, and trying 'direct animation' using 16 mm film.

Participants are welcome to bring in their own equipment, old and new, digital and analogue, which may include mobile phones, go-pro’s, video cameras… anything goes!

Further sessions on video/sound editing will be based in MAC's fully equipped Media Studio, with access to iMac computers, Final Cut editing software and music/sound design software Logic Pro.

You will have the opportunity to screen your work to friends, family and fellow participants in MAC's Hexagon Theatre at the end of term.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. It is suitable for anyone with an interest in cinema and film making The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You are welcome to bring along your own equipment, actors/performers and props. Are there any additional costs? None Who teaches this course? Scott Johnston

Mon 20 Jan
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 27 Jan
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 3 Feb
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 10 Feb
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 24 Feb
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 2 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 9 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 16 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 23 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Mon 30 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Exploring Fibres: Carding, Spinning & Peg Loom Weaving (TE105 Spring)

An introduction to fibres and the different ways to work with them. In this course, participants will have an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres and wool to create functional and decorative pieces through carding, spinning and weaving on a peg loom. What will you learn on this course? Create fabulous fibre pieces of your own design in this course. Learn the process of turning raw fibres into a unique woven artwork. Start with the basics of what fibres are, then learn how to card fibres into roving. After you have prepared your roving learn what spinning is and how to use a drop spindle to create your own yarn that you will then learn to weave in a peg loom! You will be taught the basic skills in fibre processing, gaining a knowledge of different types of fibre and their properties and the historical context of carding, spinning and weaving. You will have the opportunity to apply your new skills to produce decorative pieces for a wall hanging or mat. The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. You will leave with some fibre samples and some more developed decorative pieces. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of working with fibres as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills, technique and develop new designs. This course involves working at low tables, includes long periods of standing and good dexterity is needed in your hands and shoulders. The course may not be suitable for people with disabilities but you may contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. A carer or support worker may assist but must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron. All materials and equipment are provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Fri 24 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 31 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 7 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 14 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 28 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 6 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 13 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 20 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 27 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 3 Apr
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Exposure I: Digital Photography (DM01 Spring)

A fun and friendly course introducing digital camera basics for people with a fancy camera but little idea how to use it to its full potential. What will you learn on this course? This is a fun and friendly course introducing digital camera basics for people with a fancy camera but little idea how to use it to its full potential. It’s an opportunity for you to unleash your creativity, have fun with your camera and start creating pictures you will want to keep, share and maybe even print! Or, if you have some photography experience this is an opportunity to continue or start a portfolio of your best shots or create a new body of work. You will be taught the basic rules of composition and lighting and get a real insight into what all those knobs and buttons on your camera are for. You will also learn how aperture, shutter speed and ISO all work together to help you create stunning pictures and get the best out of your camera. Throughout the course you will be encouraged to think creatively and to use your camera as a tool for expression. Using our desktop apple mac computers you will also learn post production skills and file management basics. Each week participants will be set a short weekly assignment to practice what they have learned that week. The tutor encourages knowledge sharing and participation from all members of the group creating a relaxed learning environment where you can freely ask those questions you’ve always wanted to about you camera. Some 1-2-1 support may be given but this will depend on class numbers therefore independent research, learning and the completion of practical weekly photography assignments in-between classes is encouraged. An active element of each week is downloading, discussing and reviewing each other’s images shot in response to the weekly challenge. On completion of this course you will have a solid understanding of the basics of photography and an improved confidence in the operation of your camera. You should feel inspired to be creative with your camera and want to explore your own capabilities further. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and you don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. This course is aimed at people with a digital camera that usually shoot in ‘Auto’ but would like to understand how the camera works and how to take better pictures using manual settings. It’s ideally suited for people with DSLR, Bridge, Compact System Cameras, Mirrorless Interchangeable Lens Cameras or a compact camera for enthusiasts that has manual settings.

If you have a basic compact point and shoot camera but are thinking of upgrading to one of the above, then we do have a limited number of DSLR’s that can be borrowed during the class.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a camera. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Bring along your camera, a tripod if you have one and appropriate clothing for going outside.

You can bring your own laptops or tablets if you prefer to use these for post-production instead of the Apple Macs provided but please remember any cables you might need to connect your camera to your device. It is also useful if you bring a copy of your camera manual.

Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Kate Green

Mon 20 Jan
Deloitte Room

£82 (£75)

Mon 27 Jan
Deloitte Room

£82 (£75)

Mon 3 Feb
Deloitte Room

£82 (£75)

Mon 10 Feb
Deloitte Room

£82 (£75)

Family Play Dhol Drum (MU105 Spring)

Family Play Dhol Drum Learn the techniques and rhythms of the traditional Punjabi Dhol drum as family. We provide the drums and beaters so you can get started straight away on your Dhol drum journey. You will be taught and guided by two Dhol Drum expert tutors in partnership with Services For Education. What will you learn on this course?

Learn to play and perform the Punjabi Dhol drum through a structured, professional environment through a set syllabus with a wide range of traditional and Western beats.

In these sessions you will be taught by highly experienced tutor Harjit Singh with over 30 years of experience in teaching and performing Punjabi Folk music.

The course tuition is provided by the Head of Percussion & World Music from the multi-award-winning Services for Education Music Service in partnership with MAC Birmingham. In 2018/19, the Music Service’s Azaad Dhol Group, directed by Harjit performed at the Royal Albert Hall, Symphony Hall, ICC, Royal Birmingham Conservatoire and Ruddock Performing Arts Centre.

We provide Dhol tuition in a fun, friendly and creative environment where you will learn and develop basic and specific techniques using the Dagga and Tilli. Opportunities for performance and grades will be offered throughout the course, and both traditional Bhangra and classical beats will be taught.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to participants aged 8-17 plus a parent or guardian. It is open to beginners and improvers. Whether you are someone that has never played the Dhol before or want to gain further skills and qualifications then this is the course for you.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You need good upper body and manual dexterity. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker and the room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? We will provide Dhol drums and beaters for the sessions, but you are welcome to bring your own instruments. Are there any additional costs? No Who teaches this course? Harjit Singh & Jagdev Saini on behalf of Services for Education Music Service.

Tue 21 Jan
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 28 Jan
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 4 Feb
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 11 Feb
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 25 Feb
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 3 Mar
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 10 Mar
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 17 Mar
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 24 Mar
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Tue 31 Mar
Music Studio 5

£49.50 (Children £49.50–£99)

Family Pottery (FA02 Spring)

Explore the world of clay together and learn about different hand-building techniques and exciting ways to decorate your clay work.

What will you learn on this course?

This termly course provides an exciting introduction to ceramics. It’s a perfect opportunity for you and your child to learn more about each other as well as to develop a shared interest in the medium of clay. You will learn different hand-building techniques such as coiling, slab building, sculpting clay and using moulds. The tutor will then support you to explore your own ideas, showing you how to apply these techniques to realise your own designs. You will also have access to specialist tools to add decoration to your work including the application of glazes. You will be encouraged to review and refine your work to produce finished ceramic pieces that are unique and of a high standard. The tutor will begin by demonstrating different techniques and suggesting possible outcomes, allowing you to experiment with your own ideas. Further demonstrations and 1-2-1 support will be given as required as you develop your own projects. Class members will be encouraged to share their work and ideas with the group. A glossary of technical terms and a hand out sheet summarising what has been covered throughout the course will be provided. In addition to practical making skills the tutor will use visual resources such as ceramics magazines and books to give you an understanding of both historical and contemporary ceramic artist’s work. By the end of this course you will have learned how to use all the equipment in the ceramic studio safely and correctly. You will have learned a range of techniques, made high quality ceramic pieces to your own design and have the confidence to continue working in ceramics. Your finished glazed ceramic creation will be ready to collect from Mac two to four weeks later to allow time for firing to take place. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years accompanied by their parents or guardians who are looking for an opportunity to enjoy learning together. It is open to all levels. Those with little or no experience of pottery will be shown demonstrations for the various techniques used and those with previous experience will be able to self-direct their work with guidance from the tutor.

The course is accessible for people of all abilities as we provide a learning support worker, parents and guardians work with their children and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with clay. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided.

Are there any additional costs?

The course price includes all materials and firing of your work.

The course price covers one adult and one child. There is a charge for each additional person (child or adult). At least one adult must be present for every three children. Who teaches this course? Olga Terry

Sat 25 Jan
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 1 Feb
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 8 Feb
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 15 Feb
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 29 Feb
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 7 Mar
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 14 Mar
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 21 Mar
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 28 Mar
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Sat 4 Apr
Pottery Studio

£81 (Children £81–£162)

Figurative Sculpture (SC01 Spring)

Working directly from a life model, explore traditional and contemporary ways to sculpt the human figure in clay. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years and is designed for all levels, beginners, improvers and advanced practitioners as our tutor will tailor the class to your skill level. This course is perfect for students interested in the human form and learning to sculpt it in clay. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with the clay and the tools. Students may bring their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course is for students who will learn sculpting the human form in clay, and develop your own artistic style and technique. You will have the opportunity to model in clay from a nude life model who may hold several poses over the course duration allowing you to create for more than one sculpture. There will be more emphasis on this course on developing your observational skills and translating these into more personal representations of the human form, moving away from making a direct copy of the model. You will be encouraged to experiment and explore different approaches that will help you to find your own artistic methods and style. You will be working in mac’s fully equipped sculpture studio with buff, terracotta and crank clays. There may be the option to fire and glaze completed works. We aim to rotate life models across classes and terms so that students are able to work from a different subject than on a previous course. Coming on this course is a great way to experience working with other like-minded people in a relaxed studio environment. By the end of the course you should have two finished sculptures that will then be fired for you to take home. Please note the clay must dry out before firing so your model will be available to collect 4-5 weeks later. There is a short break in the middle of each class. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? Each student is allocated a fixed amount of clay to work with. If you want to produce work that uses more than this it will be at an extra cost. Roughly £7 per large bag of clay plus a small additional to cost to fire. Who teaches this course? Barbara Pianca

Tue 21 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 28 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 4 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 11 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 25 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 3 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 10 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 17 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 24 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Tue 31 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Film Stories presents Movie Geek Live!

A new regular monthly live show, where Film Stories editor Simon Brew chats film, shows clips, interviews filmmakers in person and talks nerdy stuff. With special guests, an audience Q&A and lots of geeky movie stuff.

Wed 22 Jan
Cinema

£5

Wed 26 Feb
Cinema

£5

Friday Evening Life Drawing and Painting with Paul Bartlett (VA10 Spring)

An opportunity to work on individual life drawing and painting projects, giving you the chance to extend and develop your existing skills and build a portfolio of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers and advanced students. Anyone who is at a stage where they can work independently while benefitting from tutor led group concentration and support is welcome to attend. This course is beneficial to students wishing to supplement basic methods and techniques taught on other courses as well as those putting together a portfolio, artists wishing to resolve works for exhibition and art teachers seeking quality creative time for themselves. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This is not a taught course but an opportunity for experienced students and artists to progress with their individual creative journey, while gaining confidence by relating to others in a conducive working environment. You will work directly from an unclothed professional life model who will hold a whole evening pose set up by the artist tutor. We employ a range of different male and female models for our life drawing and painting courses. We usually have the same model sit for two consecutive weeks. The artist tutor, while being available for general advice, will be teaching through demonstration, working on his own drawing and establishing an environment that enables all artists to benefit from shared concentration. At the student’s request, one-to-one support may be given to consolidate drawing skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, colour, using art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels and paint. These sessions are an excellent opportunity to further your individual drawing and painting in response to a life model, gaining an insight into how the human form can be a fascinating ongoing topic for artistic study in its own right. You will be sharing a journey with artists over many centuries that have found it to be a useful discipline, complementing their other arts activities. This class includes a short break. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, erasers, sharpeners. Most students prefer to provide their own art materials that they bring to the class. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, masking tape, paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Fri 24 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 31 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 7 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 14 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 28 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 6 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 13 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 20 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 27 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Fri 3 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

From Paper to Fabric (TE04 Spring)

Introducing block and screen-printing and machine embroidery, this course offers a practical exploration into surface design. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people who are both completely new to textiles, those who wish to learn new approaches to design, those wanting to learn print processes, combine stitch with print, revisit their love of textiles and those who want to extend and improve their techniques. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities and operate a sewing machine. Students can be accompanied by a carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course involves working at low tables and good dexterity is needed in your hands. What will you learn on this course? This course offers a practical exploration into surface print design through the techniques of block printing, screen printing, hand and machine embroidery. You will explore the process of creating your own unique designs from primary sources to create printed paper and fabric which you can embellish with stitch. On this course you will learn how to: • Undertake primary and secondary research • Use a sketchbook to record research and generate original design ideas • Create Block prints using either Lino cuts, Neoprene blocks or Collographs • Understand colour theory and its application in your work • Explore the Formal Element as applied to textiles • Create a variety of repeat print designs • Use a variety of hand stitches to embellish your print work • Use free motion machine embroidery to embellish your prints • Screenprint using stencils, polyprint and binder AQ or dyes and Manutex print paste • Apply colour separation to create screenprints As you progress on this course you will bring your research, designs and the techniques learnt together to make original artwork. The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. Students will be provided with handouts for each technique and will build a personal portfolio of samples to refer to for future projects. Each term gives a focus to a different theme. Previous themes have included architecture, edible, nature and lettering. The course content is guided by the ability and prior experience of the students attending. Students wishing to re-enrol are welcomed and assisted to develop their skills further and work on individual projects with guided support from the tutor. Previously students have made wall hanging, framed artwork, artist books, cushions, boxes, friezes, fabric for clothing and much more. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron, an A4 or larger ring bound sketchbook and/or plastic wallet and a pair of sharp scissors. All other materials and equipment is provided. If you own a sewing machine you can have it PAT tested for a small fee and bring it in to use during class. Are there any additional costs? You will need to provide the items listed above at your own expense. Ring bound scrapbook approx. £8.50. Apron approx. £5.00 Scissors approx. £8.00 Who teaches this course? Helen Lane

Wed 22 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 29 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 5 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 12 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 26 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 4 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 11 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 18 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 25 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Wed 1 Apr
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Gentle Hatha Yoga (WB09 Spring)

This gentle form of yoga exercise combines physical practice with meditation leading to a more relaxed state of being. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for all ability levels including beginners who have no prior experience of Hatha yoga. This course is not suitable during pregnancy or if attempting to become pregnant. You should consult your doctor if you have any medical conditions which could be affected by taking exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but you must be able to get up and down from the floor unaided. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn Hatha yoga, a gentle form of yoga exercise. Each class provides approximately 1hr of physical practice which includes postures based on lying down, sitting, kneeling and standing positions. The remaining time is divided between a breathing or meditation practice and a relaxation. The class emphasises working steadily and mindfully in coordination with the breath. As a new posture is introduced each week and those covered in previous weeks are revisited you will gain the most benefit by attending on a regular basis from the beginning of the term. The tutor provides group instruction with individual assistance as required. By attending this course you can expect to improve your physical coordination of movement and breath, balance and increase awareness of your posture. With practice you will cultivate a more relaxed state of being and a greater union of body, breath and mind. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You also need to bring a yoga mat and a blanket to keep warm during meditation. Are there any additional costs? You must provide a yoga mat and blanket at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Madeleine Mott

Tue 21 Jan
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 18 Feb
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 25 Feb
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Randle Studio

£114.50 (£105.50)

Group Guitar (MU06 Spring)

Learn how to play the guitar from scratch or improve on your playing, look at different musical notation and ways to approach the instrument. Gain confidence playing as part of a group in this exciting course for beginners and improvers.

What will you learn on this course?

This course will teach guitar for those with no previous experience or skills. Learning includes: chords; strumming; finger picking and learning songs to develop your music skills. We learn music from a range of popular music styles taught by an experienced musical artist.

In order to progress students are expected and must be prepared to practise between lessons and need access to an instrument to do so.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to adults 18+ for beginners and improvers

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You need good upper body and manual dexterity. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker and the room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? You need to bring your own guitar, all music sheets are provided. Are there any additional costs? A guitar if you do not have one. Who teaches this course? Gary Williams

Wed 22 Jan
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 29 Jan
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 5 Feb
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 12 Feb
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 26 Feb
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 4 Mar
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 11 Mar
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 18 Mar
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 25 Mar
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Wed 1 Apr
Music Studio 1

£121 (£110)

Hatha Yoga (WB12 Spring)

This yoga course combines meditation, postures and breathing techniques to develop a profound relaxation technique.

What will you learn on this course?

Hatha is a subtle classical yoga which incorporates various asanas (postures) and is deepened with the use of pranayamas (breathing exercises) and meditation. You will learn sequences that combine postures and breathing exercises. These sequences become familiar over the duration of the course and the learning process happens naturally as part of the flow of the class. You will also learn various meditation techniques and how yoga is innate, bringing a mindfulness to one’s practice that leads to deep relaxation and joy.

The tutor will also introduce you to Dru Yoga. Dru Yoga is deeply relaxing, yet rejuvenating. Made up of sequences ranging from soft and flowing to more dynamic and containing classic yoga postures, it's a style of yoga that integrates movement, breath-work, an appreciation of subtle energy and directed intention to integrate our body, mind and spirit. It works well for improving fitness, strength and flexibility and can bring a positive change to our thinking. It also re-balances and uplifts our emotions.

Dru Yoga classes are renowned for their empowering and supportive atmosphere and classes aim to give students a warm inner certainty that they’re in charge of their life and health!

Other health benefits include a greater dexterity in balance, flexibility and concentration. This is complemented by a sense of well-being which arises naturally from the process of engaging in yoga.

The class is taught through group demonstrations by the tutor and may include handouts and the opportunity to participate in discussion about your practice with the tutor and the rest of the group.

By attending this course you can expect to gain a deeper understanding of the philosophy of yoga and the confidence to practice both in the class and independently.

You should avoid having a meal during the 2 hours before the class.

Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+ and is open to students of all levels. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice. The nature of the course has a philosophy that allows students to participate in group sequences while developing their own understanding and engaging with yoga at their own pace.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You must bring your own yoga mat and a blanket or extra layer of clothing to keep you warm during meditation. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) must be provided at your own expense. These are readily available online or from sports shops. Who teaches this course? Liz Winchurch

Thu 23 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 30 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 6 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 13 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 27 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 5 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 12 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 19 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 26 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 2 Apr
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Hatha Yoga (WB13 Spring)

This yoga course combines meditation, postures and breathing techniques to develop a profound relaxation technique.

What will you learn on this course?

Hatha is a subtle classical yoga which incorporates various asanas (postures) and is deepened with the use of pranayamas (breathing exercises) and meditation. You will learn sequences that combine postures and breathing exercises. These sequences become familiar over the duration of the course and the learning process happens naturally as part of the flow of the class. You will also learn various meditation techniques and how yoga is innate, bringing a mindfulness to one’s practice that leads to deep relaxation and joy. Other health benefits include a greater dexterity in balance, flexibility and concentration. This is complemented by a sense of well-being which arises naturally from the process of engaging in yoga.

The class is taught through group demonstrations by the tutor and may include handouts and the opportunity to participate in discussion about your practice with the tutor and the rest of the group.

By attending this course you can expect to gain a deeper understanding of the philosophy of yoga and the confidence to practice both in the class and independently.

You should avoid having a meal during the 2 hours before the class.

Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+ and is open to students of all levels. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice. The nature of the course has a philosophy that allows students to participate in group sequences while developing their own understanding and engaging with yoga at their own pace.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Please note that this course is not designed for pregnant women.

All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You must bring your own yoga mat and a blanket or extra layer of clothing to keep you warm during meditation. Are there any additional costs? You must provide a yoga mat at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Helen Wallis

Thu 23 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 30 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 6 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 13 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 27 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 5 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 12 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 19 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 26 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 2 Apr
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Honey Boy

From a screenplay by Shia LaBeouf based on his own experiences as a child actor, award-winning filmmaker Alma Har'el brings to life a young actor's stormy childhood and early adult years as he struggles to reconcile with his father and deal with his mental health. Fictionalizing his ascent to stardom, and subsequent crash-landing into rehab and recovery, Har'el casts Noah Jupe and Lucas Hedges as Otis Lort, navigating different stages in a frenetic career. LaBeouf takes on the therapeutic challenge of playing a version of his own father, an ex-rodeo clown and a felon. Har'el's feature narrative debut is a one-of-a-kind collaboration between filmmaker and subject, exploring art as medicine and imagination as hope through the life and times of a talented, traumatized performer who dares to go in search of himself.

Tue 21 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Thu 23 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Illustration and Animation (DM108 Spring)

This course is an introduction to the art of illustration and animation techniques.

What will you learn on this course?

Lead by a professional film maker, illustrator and animator you will learn how to create your own illustrations and animated loops. You will gain an understanding of essential illustration and animation principles and be introduced to different stylistic approaches and artistic techniques.

Using a combination of practical design demonstrations and 1-2-1 support you will receive guidance tailored to your individual projects and needs.

On completion of this course you can expect to have gained an understanding of a range of approaches to illustrating and animating and have produced your own illustrated artwork.

The course will cover • Drawing skills • Use of colour • Composition • Stylistic choices Story writing • Character development • Introduction to contemporary artists work in both illustration and animation • Exploration of illustration and animation genres

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is for beginners and improvers who would like to develop skills in developing their illustration and animation skills.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to undertake practical arts and crafts activities and use a computer. A carer or support worker may assist learners on this course. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything as all materials and equipment is provided. You are welcome to bring your own tablets, laptops and filming devices in consultation with the tutor. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Fri 24 Jan
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 31 Jan
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 7 Feb
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 14 Feb
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 28 Feb
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 6 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 13 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 20 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 27 Mar
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Fri 3 Apr
Media Studio

£131 (£119)

Illustration Techniques (VA46 Spring)

Learn traditional illustration techniques that will see you create an image or painting based on your favourite piece of text from a book, novel or poem. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. Beginners who have no illustration experience will be taught the basics. Students with previous drawing and painting experience can develop their skills further and learn traditional illustration. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? On this two-part course you will learn to create an image or painting based on one of your favourite piece of text from a novel, poem, etc. You will be introduced to the concept of creating illustrations based on words, using traditional illustration techniques to create your own narrative paintings. You will explore the entire process from text to drawing to finished painted illustration. The course will cover the following skills: Composition techniques Perspective techniques Colour studies Interpreting the text in a literal and non-literal way Thumbnail sketches Using carbon transfer paper to copy drawings Capturing mood and atmosphere using paint The course will be taught through a combination of demonstrations and examples, practical tasks and work on individual projects. The tutor will provide guidance and assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. On completion of this course you can expect to have a gained an understanding of how to approach illustration for text and have completed some sample pieces and a finished painted illustration. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as paints, pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? Any additional materials are provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Tue 21 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 28 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 4 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 11 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 25 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 3 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 10 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 17 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 24 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 31 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Tue 7 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Indie Comic Creation (DM107 Spring)

Learn the art of creating indie comics from character development, drawing and illustration, which software to use, and how to get your comic to market.

What will you learn on this course?

The course will introduce you to the world of indie comics, from character development, storyboarding to publishing your own anthology.

Taught by a professional freelance comic and graphic novel illustrator the course will cover

• Introduction to contemporary indie comics • Developing your drawing, illustration and composition skills • Developing your comic characters • Learn how to use drawing tablets and illustration software • Develop your use of colour palettes • Create storyboards and devise narrative storytelling • Guidance on indie comic networks and events
• Guidance on how to get your work to market • Guest speakers from the comic industry • The opportunity to produce a collaborative MAC Indie Comic Creation publication at the end of the course.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open beginners and improvers. This is a great course for those who are interested in the art of comics.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities and using computer equipment. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners.

You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with.

Are there any additional costs?

You may wish to provide additional materials at your own expense.

Who teaches this course? Jessica Taylor

Sat 25 Jan
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 1 Feb
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 8 Feb
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 15 Feb
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 29 Feb
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 7 Mar
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 14 Mar
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 21 Mar
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 28 Mar
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Sat 4 Apr
Media Studio

£140 (£127)

Introduction to Art Techniques (VA06 Spring)

An introduction to the different art techniques and skills used in drawing and painting taught through personal projects to develop each individual student’s own style and approach. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to painting and drawing or anyone who would like to revisit basic techniques. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course provides an introduction to the different art techniques and materials used in drawing and painting. The aim of this course is to equip you with the skills required to begin to develop your own individual artistic style and approach. You will learn to use the following materials: Charcoal Pastel Inks Acrylics Mixed media and specific painting techniques including: layering of paint composition colour mixing use of colour You will learn these techniques by drawing and painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and abstracts. During the first half of the term new techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several finished drawings and paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in art techniques and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, acrylic paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Wed 22 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 29 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 5 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 12 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 26 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 4 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 11 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 18 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 25 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Wed 1 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Introduction to Art Techniques (VA07 Spring)

An introduction to the different art techniques and skills used in drawing and painting taught through personal projects to develop each individual student’s own style and approach. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to painting and drawing or anyone who would like to revisit basic techniques. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course provides an introduction to the different art techniques and materials used in drawing and painting. The aim of this course is to equip you with the skills required to begin to develop your own individual artistic style and approach. You will learn to use the following materials: Charcoal Pastel Inks Acrylics Mixed media and specific painting techniques including: layering of paint composition colour mixing use of colour You will learn these techniques by drawing and painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and abstracts. During the first half of the term new techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several finished drawings and paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in art techniques and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, acrylic paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Thu 23 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Thu 9 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£157.50 (£143.50)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE01 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Mon 20 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 27 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 3 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 10 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 24 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 2 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 9 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 16 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 23 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 30 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE02 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Thu 23 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE08 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics.

What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Olga Terry

Wed 22 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 29 Jan
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 5 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 12 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 26 Feb
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 4 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 11 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 18 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 25 Mar
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Wed 1 Apr
Pottery Studio

£169.50 (£154.50)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE106 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics.

What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance.

Who teaches this course? Barbara Pianca

Thu 23 Jan
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Pottery Studio

£183.50 (£167.50)

Introduction to Creative Physical Computing & Electronics (DM106 Spring)

Calling all creatives who would like to add digital technology in to their work. Learn about Arduinos, raspberry pi’s, coding, sensors, inputs and outputs, digital and analogue methods to create sound, light and movement in your art works and craft projects.

What will you learn on this course?

This course encourages creatives to explore electronics, you will have the opportunity to experiment with Arduinos, raspberry pi’s, LEDs, motors and sensors and be introduced to basic coding. The course is taught by a professional electronics interface designer and fine artist who works with lights and optical illusions such as persistence of vision in her artistic work.

The course will cover the following subject areas:

Inputs and outputs Analogue and digital Working with sound, light and movement. Sensors Data and data art and visualisation Arduino’s, raspberry pi’s, neopixels and LEDs Introduction to Coding

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults ages 18+. It is specifically designed for beginners and those new to electronics and physical computing. You will not need any previous experience but just an open mind to try new artistic methods.

The course may be accessible for people disabilities, some manual dexterity is required and this will involve some detail based activities. Carers are welcome, please book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The building is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Basic equipment will be available for students to explore in the sessions. The tutor will be able to recommend sources for equipment should students wish to purchase their own. You are welcome to bring your own laptops and tablets and equipment to work on during the class Are there any additional costs? None Who teaches this course? Catherine Jones

Thu 23 Jan
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 30 Jan
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 6 Feb
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 13 Feb
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 27 Feb
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 5 Mar
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 12 Mar
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 19 Mar
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 26 Mar
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Thu 2 Apr
Weston Studio

£157 (£143)

Introduction to Creative Writing

Begin or kick-start your creative writing journey with author Carol Preston. Learn writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering to generate ideas to explore in class and take home and develop further.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is designed to kick-start you into writing creatively. You will be taught how to generate material using writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering. By examining of the work of published writers you will learn about techniques such as:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

You will be encouraged to develop some of these techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback. Tea and coffee will be provided.

By the end of the course everyone will have several pieces of their own writing which have been generated in response to tutor topics and techniques along with hand-outs on these topics for further consideration and development.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. Previous experience in creative writing is not required as full instruction will be given. This course is also suitable for anyone who lacks confidence in their writing or hasn’t written creatively for a while.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Sat 25 Jan

£45 (£43)

Introduction to Digital Music Technology (DM103 Spring)

Delve into digital music technology, learn how to use Logic Pro X, cre-ate your own digital music, learn re-mixing and digital music production techniques. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. This course is de-signed for both beginners and improvers, those who would like an intro-duction to digital music making and to those looking to improve their skills. You don’t need any previous experience or musical knowledge as full instruction and guidance is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a computer. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attend-ing a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your spe-cific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course is ideal for the budding producer or musician interested in learning how to make music with a computer or learn the skills required to mix music. Working in the MAC media studio on a suite of Apple Mac computers you will learn how to use Logic Pro X software and DAW (Digital Audio Workstation). You will be taught how to create your own sounds from scratch, source samples, produce effects and bring your music to life with use of soft-ware automation. The course covers essential skills such as: Creating basic arrangements Understanding song structure Recording MIDI MIDI programming Recording instruments and sounds Experimenting with different microphones and equipment Creating beats and sounds from scratch Music editing and mixing Advanced audio editing Software Automation Mixing and Mastering Each week the tutor will set tasks and small projects designed to incor-porate the new skills that you have learned, such as how to create a piece of music from a poem or spoken word piece, create an experi-mental piece by recording everyday sounds, and also learn how to re-mix music. Participants will leave understanding how music is created, assembled and produced and have a wider appreciation of specialist music soft-ware. As well as 1-2-1 support, at the end of each lesson you will listen to eve-ryone’s work and share feedback and comments and participants have the opportunity to publish and share their work so that the world can hear their achievements on Soundcloud. https://soundcloud.com/macmusictech Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Hazel Buller

Tue 21 Jan
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 28 Jan
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 4 Feb
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 11 Feb
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 25 Feb
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 3 Mar
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 10 Mar
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 17 Mar
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 24 Mar
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Tue 31 Mar
Media Studio

£145 (£132)

Introduction to Experimental Drawing & Painting Techniques (VA08 Spring)

In this course you will be introduced to experimental drawing and painting techniques. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people with no previous experience and those who wish to develop their practical skills and confidence. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical craft activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you the basic skills of drawing and painting through an investigation into experimental approaches. Participants will have the opportunity to work with a broad variety of materials and explore the qualities of each medium. The first part of the course will be in the form of practical demonstrations and workshops to develop skills and the confidence to experiment. During the second part of the course individuals will be encouraged to develop their own individual projects in their preferred mediums. The tutor will tailor guidance to your level of experience and help you to achieve your aims for your work. There will be opportunities for group discussions and critique. On completing this course you should gain an understanding of how work can be developed from initial experimentation into resolved pieces of creative work. You will have produced a small portfolio of practical work including drawings, painting, collage, mixed media. Do you need to bring anything? Basic art materials will be provided but students will be expected to provide some of their own additional materials as the course progresses. Are there any additional costs? Any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney

Fri 24 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 31 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 7 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 14 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 28 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 6 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 13 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 20 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 27 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Fri 3 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Introduction to Jewellery: Inspired By Nature

Design and make your own nature themed jewellery in this 6-week short course. Learn how to cut, heat, pattern, solder and polish metal to create unique pieces of jewellery inspired by nature. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course as full instruction is given. If you have some previous experience and would like to develop your skills, learn some new techniques and work on your own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs What will you learn on this course? During this 6-week short course you will learn how to make your own nature inspired jewellery under the instruction of a skilled tutor. You will be introduced to a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques that may include: • saw piercing • filing • annealing • soldering • polishing • texturing You will then learn how to develop a design from paper to practice creating your jewellery based on your nature themed design. Our fully equipped studio has workbenches, soldering hearth, pickle bath, rolling mill, pendant motors and a variety of hand tools including piercing saws, files, hammers and punches which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have jewellery you have designed and made yourself, either to wear or to give to friends and family. Do you need to bring anything? All materials, tools and equipment are provided including a small piece of silver to make your jewellery. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Fri 24 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 31 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 7 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 14 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 21 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 28 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 6 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 13 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 20 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 27 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 3 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 10 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 17 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 24 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 1 May
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 8 May
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 15 May
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 22 May
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 29 May
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 5 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 12 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 19 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 26 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 3 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Fri 10 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£78 (£71)

Introduction to Jewellery (JE01 Spring)

Learn basic techniques, including soldering, saw piercing and filing and make jewellery from your own designs. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. This is a beginners course so you do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course. If you have some previous experience such as making beaded jewellery or some other basic procedures and would like to develop your skills further, learn some new techniques with the tutor’s support and guidance, you are welcome to attend this course. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the skills necessary to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery. The materials used are copper, brass, gilding metal and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: • Sawing and cutting out metals • soldering to join metals • polishing and buffing • forming • casting techniques • finishing processes These techniques will be taught through a series of exercises such as: • Making a simple ring to a set design • Making a pendant to your own design • Making and enamelling a piece of jewellery to your own design The first exercise will be intensively supported but as you gain skills and confidence you will be supported to develop your own designs and encouraged to work independently. mac’s fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All tools and safety equipment is provided. You can supply your own materials if you choose. Health and Safety Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram • Making a pendant to your own design • Making and enamelling a piece of jewellery to your own design The first exercise will be intensively supported but as you gain skills and confidence you will be supported to develop your own designs and encouraged to work independently. mac’s fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All tools and safety equipment is provided. You can supply your own materials if you choose. Health and Safety Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Mon 20 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 27 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 3 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 10 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 24 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 2 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 9 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 16 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 23 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 30 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Introduction to Jewellery (JE03 Spring)

Learn basic techniques, including soldering, saw piercing and filing and make jewellery from your own designs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the skills necessary to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery. The materials used are copper, brass, gilding metal and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: • Sawing and cutting out metals • soldering to join metals • polishing and buffing • forming • casting techniques • vitreous enamelling • finishing processes These techniques will be taught through a series of exercises such as: • Making a simple ring to a set design • Making a pendant to your own design • Making and enamelling a piece of jewellery to your own design The first exercise will be intensively supported but as you gain skills and confidence you will be supported to develop your own designs and encouraged to work independently. mac’s fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. This is a beginners course so you do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course. If you have some previous experience such as making beaded jewellery or some other basic procedures and would like to develop your skills further, learn some new techniques with the tutor’s support and guidance, you are welcome to attend this course. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All tools and safety equipment is provided. You can supply your own materials if you choose. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Chloe Minihane Slater

Wed 22 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 29 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 5 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 12 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 26 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 4 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 11 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 18 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 25 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 1 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Introduction to Mosaics (CE104 Spring)

Learn the art of creating beautiful mosaics in this practical course.

What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you the fundamental principles and introduce you to the world of mosaics, providing you with skills, knowledge and confidence to create your own mosaics at home. This is also an introductory course that will prepare you to continue learning other mosaic techniques as part of our new programme of mosaic courses.

We will teach you how to: - create a drawing or design in preparation for making a mosaic - Utilise tile cutters to cut and shape ceramic (or glass if applicable) tiles for mosaic - Understand and apply the direct method for mosaic making - Apply movement or flow to your mosaic, known as mosaic ‘andamento’ - Fix your mosaic tiles onto a wooden board using the correct adhesive - Complete your work with grout, clean and polish it to take home with you.

Think about a design idea and bring your printed images with you and/or any drawings to the first class. Alternatively design templates will be also available.

The mosaic projects you will work on will be within the following dimensions 21cmx29cm or 30cmx30cm dependent on the design.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. This is a practical mosaic course aimed at complete beginners but all levels are welcome. Learners will be introduced to this subject whilst Improvers and advanced students will be guided in their projects, The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant mosaic or ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Bring any images and design ideas with you. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and equipment. Who teaches this course? Paula Ligo

Wed 22 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 29 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 5 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 12 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 26 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 4 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 11 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 18 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 25 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Wed 1 Apr
Sculpture Studion

£178 (£162)

Introduction to Oil Painting Techniques (VA93 Spring)

Learn how to paint successfully with oil paints. This course will cover themes such as portraiture, still life, a Master Copy painting and landscapes. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. Beginners who have no oil painting experience will be taught the basics. Students with previous oil painting experience can develop their skills further. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will be introduced to oil painting techniques covering themes such as portraiture, still life, a Master Copy painting and landscapes. You will also learn the following skills Preparing and priming your canvas How to transfer your drawings on to canvas The technique of fat over lean How to lay out an organised palette How to work with limited colours Laying down tonal ground Under painting Value studies Colour mixing The course will be taught through a combination of demonstrations and examples, practical tasks and work on individual projects. The tutor will provide guidance and assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. On completion of this course you can expect to have a gained an understanding of how to approach oil painting. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Basic oil painting materials will be provided but students are encouraged to bring their own materials as they develop their techniques and skill. Are there any additional costs? Any additional materials are provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Wed 22 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 29 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 5 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 12 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 26 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 4 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 11 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 18 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 25 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 1 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Wed 8 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£180.50 (£164.50)

Introduction to Photorealism Techniques (VA92 Spring)

Learn the art of photorealism and produce a photorealistic portrait, developing your interpretation of form and tone bringing your portrait to life with meticulous detail. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open beginners so you don’t need any previous drawing experience. A great course for those interested in learning to draw or attempting portraiture for the first time. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? Starting each session with short portrait challenges, to develop your confidence, observational and free-hand drawing skills. Based on a grid technique utilised by iconic contemporary portraiture artists such as Chuck Close, over the course you will work towards producing a photorealistic portrait, developing your interpretation of form and tone bringing your portrait to life with meticulous detail. The course will cover the following skills: Observational skills Improving the artist’s eye Techniques of proportion, lighting, tone, form and detail Selection of appropriate materials to achieve desired effect Time management skills and methodical planning Fine motor skills Confidence Building The course will be taught through a combination of group challenges and individual work on portrait drawings. The tutor will set challenges and provide assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. The course will focus on drawing using different grades of pencils and graphite sticks however advanced students are welcome to bring materials to work in other mediums such as watercolour or pastels. On completion of this course you can expect to have a selection of drawings and portraits. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? You may wish to provide additional materials at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Milan Topalovic

Wed 22 Jan
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 29 Jan
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 5 Feb
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 12 Feb
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 26 Feb
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 4 Mar
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 11 Mar
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 18 Mar
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 25 Mar
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Wed 1 Apr
Weston Studio

£132 (£120)

Introduction to Photoshop (DM08 Spring)

Learn how to use Photoshop image manipulation software for a range media related tasks such as transforming photographs and creating graphic design elements.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to use Photoshop Elements image manipulation software for a range of media related tasks such as enhancing photographs and creating graphics for use in print or on the web.

The course is particularly useful for photographers who want to learn how to adjust things like brightness, contrast and colour levels. The course also covers more technical skills such as retouching and how to create more abstract graphic images. You might require graphics for marketing purposes, teaching resources or any number of personal projects such as flyers, posters and animated web graphics.

Topics covered on this course include:

Choosing the best tools to use How to use layers Adjusting brightness and contrast Adjusting colour balance Retouching photographs Removing unwanted objects from images Photomontage e.g. placing an object onto a different background Improving old photographs Creating abstract graphic images How to work with grids and guides How to work with text and images How to make an animated gif

In the first half of the course the tutor will work with the group to teach all the basics. In the second half you will receive more individual support as you work on your personal projects. You will be working in mac’s dedicated media studio, on Apple Mac computers.

On completing this course you can expect to have a working knowledge of Photoshop Elements and a selection of photos, images and graphics that you have produced using the software. You should also be confident to continue working with Photoshop independently.

There is a short break in the middle of each class.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers, you don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. We will be introducing Photoshop image manipulation software and talking through features in detail from the very basics. The course is ideal for those starting off and useful for learners looking to improve their skills and ensure they are using the programme as efficiently as possible.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a computer. A carer or support worker may assist learners on this course. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

You will spend most of this 2 hour class sat at a computer.

Do you need to bring anything? If you wish to take your work home with you please bring a memory stick with at least 1GB of space.

You are welcome to work on your own Apple laptop with Photoshop Elements installed.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? ILdiko Nagy

Thu 23 Jan
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Media Studio

£140.50 (£128.50)

Introduction to Portraiture Drawing (VA48 Spring)

Through a variety of short drawing challenges, you will be guided through techniques of improving your artist’s eye and developing your understanding and interpretation of form and tone to produce detailed portraits. A great introduction to drawing portraits. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open beginners so you don’t need any previous drawing experience. A great course for those interested in learning to draw or attempting portraiture for the first time. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you how to draw with a focus on drawing portraits. Starting with a variety of short drawing challenges, you will be guided through techniques of improving your artist’s eye, developing your understanding and interpretation of form and tone to produce detailed portraits. The class will use a life model. mac uses a selection of male and female models for our portraiture classes. The course will cover the following skills: Observational skills Improving the artist’s eye Techniques of proportion, lighting, tone, form and detail Selection of appropriate materials to achieve desired effect Time management skills and methodical planning Fine motor skills Confidence Building The course will be taught through a combination of group challenges and individual work on portrait drawings. The tutor will set challenges and provide assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. The course will focus on drawing using different grades of pencils and graphite sticks however advanced students are welcome to bring materials to work in other mediums such as watercolour or pastels. On completion of this course you can expect to have a selection of drawings and portraits. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? You may wish to provide additional materials at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Milan Topalovic

Sat 25 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 1 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 8 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 15 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 29 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 7 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 14 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 21 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 28 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Sat 4 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£133.50 (£122.50)

Introduction to Sewing and Dressmaking (TE103 Spring)

An introduction to the techniques of sewing. Learn how to use a sewing machine and use it for dressmaking and sewing techniques, before putting them to practice by making a simple top, dress or jumpsuit.

What will you learn on this course?

This course will introduce students to the simple techniques of sewing including basic seams, darts and manipulating techniques such as pleats and gathers. The tutor will give step by step demonstrations and you will be encouraged to sew that individual step alone with additional support as required. Having completed a series of samples you will be able to apply these new skills to make a simple top, dress or jumpsuit from base patterns provided in standard graded sizes. Students will trace out the pattern and learn how to adjust it to their own size, creating a pattern for future use at home. The course covers the following:

How to sew and use a domestic machine How to sew seams, darts, pleats, finishing techniques, pockets, collars, binding and fastenings Understanding the fittings techniques used in clothes and how to toile a garment, make adjustments and adapt a pattern to fit Creating different fabric manipulation techniques used in clothing How to read a sewing pattern and make adjustments Using sewing equipment safely Precision and accuracy when sewing
How to make a garment to fit themselves (with a pattern to replicate the garment at home)

(Students will be given paper resources to take away to explain the techniques being taught)

On completion of this course you can expect to have produced a selection of small samples that will be presented in a folder with explanations for students to take home for future sewing projects. You will also have made a finished sewn product (top, dress or jumpsuit) that you can wear and a complete pattern to your size to use again. You should feel more confident about sewing clothing in the future.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners may be completely new to sewing or may not have done it for some time and will be taught all the basics. Improvers may have previous experience of sewing but want to develop their skills further by making something that they can wear and trying more advanced techniques, lessons will be adapted suitably to the group.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical sewing activities including operating a sewing machine and using an iron. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? A selection of essential sewing equipment will be provided.

You must bring a folder/plastic to store your samples and a 2.5m length of coloured cotton /linen based fabric to make your garment. (fabric is not needed during initial sessions so students can discuss with tutor’s suitability for their ideas/where to buy fabric/what kind of fabric)

We encourage you to bring your own sewing kit consisting of hand sewing needles, thread (black and white), tape measure, stitch ripper, pins, scissors (large and small), pens, pencils, ruler, tailors chalk. If you own a sewing machine and prefer to use it, you can have it PAT tested for a cost of £5 and bring it in to use during class. Please pay at Sales and Information prior to your course and testing will take place at the start of the first class. Are there any additional costs?

Items listed above that you do not already have must be provided at your own expense. An indication of the cost of these items is given below. These items can be purchased from fabric and haberdashery stores, Birmingham Rag market, EU fabrics, Barry’s fabric, fancy silk store and large supermarkets. Please contact us for more information.

Folder: £1.00-£3.00 Cotton fabric: £1.00-£3.00 per metre (2.5 metres required)

SEWING KIT Hand sewing needles: £1.00 Thread: 60p-£1.00 Tape measure: £1.00-£1.50 Stitch ripper: £1.00-£1.50 Pins: £1.00 Scissors (large and small): £1.00-£3.00 Pens/ pencils/ ruler: £1.00 Tailors chalk: £1.00-£3.00

Who teaches this course?

Charlotte Stacey

Fri 24 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 31 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 7 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 14 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 28 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 6 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 13 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 20 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 27 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Fri 3 Apr
Textiles Studio

£152.50 (£139.50)

Introduction to Wheelwork for Beginners (CE105 Spring)

You will learn a series of basic techniques in the art of wheel throwing including clay preparation to creating cylinders and bowls and then progressing to other forms followed by glazing and firing your work.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course the tutor will demonstrate the key stages of wheel throwing enabling you to create pieces with great satisfaction. You will begin by focusing on two main forms; the cylinder and the bowl. Most other forms can be learnt from those two forms. You will also learn the technique of turning. The tutor will encourage you to develop your skills and through repetition build your confidence, encouraging you to be selective about work that is retained for firing, so that you deepen your understanding of the art of wheelwork.

The tutor will encourage you to produce functional and non-functional items after completing a piece you will be introduced to the art of surface decoration with the use of various glaze colours which will then go on to be fired in the kiln. Throughout the weeks you will gain both wheel throwing and general ceramic knowledge.

Who is this course for?

The course is aimed at beginners aged 18+ years. You don’t need any previous experience of wheel throwing as full guidance will be given through all the stages. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but requires good manual dexterity and some physical strength and fitness. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Do you need to bring anything?

Short sleeves, old trousers and an apron are recommended but clay washes off easily. All materials and equipment is provided.

Are there any additional costs?

The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for any oversized work fired.

Who teaches this course?

Serge Sanghera

Tue 21 Jan
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 28 Jan
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 4 Feb
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 11 Feb
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 25 Feb
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 3 Mar
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 10 Mar
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 17 Mar
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 24 Mar
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

Tue 31 Mar
Pottery Studio

£203 (£185)

The Irishman

Who killed Jimmy Hoffa? A labour leader and the infamous head of the Teamsters union, whose connections with organised crime were wide ranging, his career ended with a conviction for jury tampering, attempted bribery and fraud, but he was pardoned by President Nixon in 1971. Not long after, he disappeared. Declared legally dead in 1982, various theories have circulated as to what happened to him. Few are as convincing as that told by Frank ‘The Irishman’ Sheeran. The account he revealed to journalist Charles Brandt is the basis of this epic crime drama. Written by Steven Zaillian, Martin Scorsese’s The Irishman weaves an engrossing and intricate web of connected events, audaciously cutting back and forth across decades. Presented through the prism of Sheeran’s (De Niro) memories of his criminal past, the film uses state-of-the-art visual effects to ‘de-age’ the cast from their 70s through their 30s. The seamless post-production allows Scorsese to bring together a megawatt cast, all on exceptional form: the former Goodfellas pairing of De Niro and Joe Pesci (out of retirement here for Scorsese), alongside Harvey Keitel, Stephen Graham, Anna Paquin, Jesse Plemons, Bobby Cannavale and Ray Romano.

Mon 20 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Iyengar Yoga for Beginners (WB103 Spring)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those who have some experience and wish to revisit their practice before moving on to the Improvers level.

If you suffer from a medical condition, we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Elisabeth Moreton

Fri 24 Jan
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 31 Jan
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 7 Feb
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 14 Feb
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 28 Feb
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 6 Mar
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 13 Mar
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 20 Mar
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 27 Mar
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Fri 3 Apr
Randle Studio

£89 (£82)

Iyengar Yoga for Improvers (WB17 Spring)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for improvers and with previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice.

If you suffer from a medical condition, we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Elisabeth Moreton

Fri 24 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 31 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 7 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 14 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 28 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 6 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 13 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 20 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 27 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Fri 3 Apr
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Iyengar Yoga (WB93 Spring)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice. If you suffer from a medical condition we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. What will you learn on this course? Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Hannah Cliff

Mon 20 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 27 Jan
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 3 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 10 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 24 Feb
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 2 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 9 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 16 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 23 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Mon 30 Mar
Randle Studio

£107 (£98)

Jewellery Inspired by Nature (JE102 Spring)

Design and make your own nature themed jewellery in this 6-week short course. Learn how to cut, heat, pattern, solder and polish metal to create unique pieces of jewellery inspired by nature. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will learn how to make your own nature inspired jewellery under the instruction of a skilled tutor. You will be introduced to a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques that may include: • saw piercing • filing • annealing • soldering • polishing • texturing You will then learn how to develop a design from paper to practice creating your jewellery based on your nature themed design. Our fully equipped studio has workbenches, soldering hearth, pickle bath, rolling mill, pendant motors and a variety of hand tools including piercing saws, files, hammers and punches which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have jewellery you have designed and made yourself, either to wear or to give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course as full instruction is given. If you have some previous experience and would like to develop your skills, learn some new techniques and work on your own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However, you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Fri 24 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 31 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 7 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 14 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 28 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 6 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 13 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 20 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 27 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Fri 3 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Jewellery Making for Improvers (JE08 Spring)

Learn further jewellery techniques to extend and develop your skills, incorporating these into your own design projects. What will you learn on this course? This is an opportunity for students with some previous jewellery making experience to learn some new skills, develop their own designs and make them in our fully equipped studio with the support and guidance of an artist tutor. Students will be guided through a series of exercises that will teach you a range of techniques and processes to develop your existing skills. No two terms are the same, the tutor writes a different program per term which is adapted to suit the students interests, developing new projects to challenge and encourage learning. Students are welcome to re-book the course to continue their jewellery development. Projects have included: Silver locket making Cylinder container with a bezel lid Multi-media brooch with a silver back – using cold connections Making a ring from scratch with a tube-set faceted gemstone Creating a silver barrel catch Chain making Techniques and Skills Available to Learn: • Cold Connections (incorporating other materials into jewellery – e.g. plastics, textiles, wood) • Vitreous Enamelling • Casting • Stone-setting (including cabochon, tube setting, claw setting, flush setting) • Advanced soldering • Fold Forming • Silicone Mould Making and Resin (Cold Enamel) • Improving existing skills such as finishing and polishing, soldering and accuracy

You will then have the opportunity to incorporate these processes into your own designs. You will be encouraged to work independently on your own projects with tutor support and guidance available. All students will have access to a range of professional equipment including work benches, a soldering hearth and blowtorch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools. You should have previous experience of working with traditional jewellery making tools. On completing the course you will have produced completed pieces of jewellery to your own design and further developed your skills and confidence in jewellery making. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ and is open to improvers and advanced students who have some jewellery making experience. Improvers may have previously attended a beginners course at mac or elsewhere and should be able in a range of basic techniques such as soldering, filing and cutting. Advanced students will have a good working knowledge of jewellery construction and be confident working independently. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Roxanna Moznabi

Tue 21 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 28 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 4 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 11 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 18 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 3 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 10 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 17 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 24 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 31 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 7 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Jewellery Making (JE101 Spring)

Learn jewellery making skills and techniques including sawing, forming, soldering and enameling and create and develop your own designs.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery in copper and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including:

saw piercing filing soldering polishing texturing forming Enamelling

Our fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly.

All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required.

On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course as full instruction is given. If you have some previous experience and would like to develop your skills, learn some new techniques and work on your own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance, you can attend this course as an improver.

The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g.

Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10
Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet

Who teaches this course?

Vanessa Miller

Thu 23 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Jewellery Making (JE89 Spring)

Learn jewellery making skills and techniques including sawing, forming, soldering and enamelling and an opportunity to create and develop your own designs. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course as full instruction is given. If you have some previous experience and would like to develop your skills, learn some new techniques and work on your own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance, you can attend this course as an improver. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn how to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery in copper and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: • saw piercing • filing • soldering • polishing • texturing • forming • etching Our fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Health and Safety Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Health and Safety Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Thu 23 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 30 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 6 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 13 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 27 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 5 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 12 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 19 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 26 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Thu 2 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Jewellery Making (JE90 Spring)

Learn jewellery making skills and techniques including sawing, forming, soldering and enameling and create and develop your own designs.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery in copper and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including:

saw piercing filing soldering polishing texturing forming Enamelling

Our fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly.

All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required.

On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course as full instruction is given. If you have some previous experience and would like to develop your skills, learn some new techniques and work on your own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance, you can attend this course as an improver.

The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g.

Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10
Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet

Who teaches this course?

Roxanna Moznabi

Tue 21 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 18 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 3 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Tue 7 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Jewellery: Open Studio (JE07 Spring)

A great opportunity for those who have an existing knowledge of jewellery making to work independently or refine their skills with assistance from the Artist Tutor.

What will you learn on this course?

This is an opportunity for experienced jewellery makers to develop their own designs and make them in our fully equipped studio with the support and guidance of an artist tutor. You will work on individual projects at your own pace with access to a range of professional equipment including work benches, a soldering hearth and blowtorch, enameling kiln, etching solutions, polishing motor and various hand tools. You should have previous experience of working with traditional jewellery making tools.

You will be expected to work independently but with the knowledge that the tutor is on hand to support you in realising your designs. This may include encouraging you to try different processes, such as granulation or casting techniques using wax, and guiding you through the specific techniques required.

Improvers can expect moderate support from the tutor and guided demonstrations of specific processes. Advanced students generally seek advice on a particular aspect of their design, require a refresher on a particular process or simply want to create work in a shared studio space.

On completing the course you will have produced completed pieces of jewellery to your own design and further developed your skills and confidence in jewellery making.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ and is open to improvers and advanced students who have jewellery making experience. Improvers may have previously attended a course at mac or elsewhere and should be confident in a range of basic techniques such as soldering, filing and cutting. Advanced students will have a good working knowledge of jewellery construction and be confident working independently. All students should come with their own design ideas

The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g.

Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10
Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet

Who teaches this course? Nick Greenhough

Wed 22 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 29 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 5 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 12 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 26 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 4 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 11 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 18 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 25 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Wed 1 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Jewellery: Open Studio (JE93 Spring)

A great opportunity for those who have an existing knowledge of jewellery making to work independently and refine their skills with support from the Artist Tutor. What will you learn on this course? Rather than a taught course this is an opportunity for jewellery makers to develop their own designs and make them in our fully equipped studio with the support of an experienced artist tutor. However, technical demonstrations are available upon direct request to the Artist Tutor. You will work on individual projects at your own pace with access to a range of professional equipment including work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools. Work produced by jewellery makers on mac courses has previously been exhibited in the made at mac gallery exhibition and selected for sale at the mac craft market. Who is this course for? This is an advanced level activity that is suitable for adults aged 18+. You must have some previous jewellery making experience and be confident in soldering, saw piercing and finishing. This is not a course but an opportunity to work independently but with help from the tutor as needed. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Thu 23 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Jewellery: Open Studio (JE95 Spring)

A great opportunity for those who have an existing knowledge of jewellery making to work independently and refine their skills with support from the Artist Tutor. What will you learn on this course? Rather than a taught course this is an opportunity for jewellery makers to develop their own designs and make them in our fully equipped studio with the support of an experienced artist tutor. However, technical demonstrations are available upon direct request to the Artist Tutor. You will work on individual projects at your own pace with access to a range of professional equipment including work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools. Work produced by jewellery makers on mac courses has previously been exhibited in the made at mac gallery exhibition and selected for sale at the mac craft market. Who is this course for? This is an advanced level activity that is suitable for adults aged 18+. You must have some previous jewellery making experience and be confident in soldering, saw piercing and finishing. This is not a course but an opportunity to work independently but with help from the tutor as needed. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Chloe Minihane Slater

Tue 21 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 28 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 4 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 11 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 25 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 3 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 10 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 17 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 24 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Tue 31 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Jewellery Workshop (JE04 Spring)

Extend and develop your skills while working on individual projects. Try processes such as granulation, or casting techniques using wax and resin.

What will you learn on this course?

This is an opportunity for students with some previous jewellery making experience to learn some new skills, develop their own designs and make them in our fully equipped studio with the support and guidance of an artist tutor.

Improvers will be guided through a series of exercises that will teach you a range of techniques and processes to develop your existing skills. The tutor will demonstrate processes such as forming, polishing, vitreous enamelling, granulation and casting techniques using wax. You will then have the opportunity to incorporate these processes into your own designs. You will gradually be encouraged to work independently on your own projects with tutor support and guidance available as required.

Advanced students will work on individual projects at your own pace but with the knowledge that the tutor is on hand to support you in realising your designs. You can take part in the exercises to learn new techniques or refresh your knowledge if you choose. The tutor will be available to offer any advice or demonstrations you require.

All students will have access to a range of professional equipment including work benches, a soldering hearth and blowtorch, enamelling kiln, etching solutions, polishing motor and various hand tools. You should have previous experience of working with traditional jewellery making tools.

On completing the course you will have produced completed pieces of jewellery to your own design and further developed your skills and confidence in jewellery making.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ and is open to improvers and advanced students who have jewellery making experience. Improvers may have previously attended a course at mac or elsewhere and should be confident in a range of basic techniques such as soldering, filing and cutting. Advanced students will have a good working knowledge of jewellery construction and be confident working independently. All students should come with their own design ideas

The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g.

Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10
Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet

Who teaches this course? Nick Greenhough

Mon 20 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 27 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 3 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 10 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 24 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 2 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 9 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 16 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 23 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Mon 30 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£161.50 (£147.50)

Jewellery Workshop (JE06 Spring)

Extend and develop your skills while working on individual projects. Try processes such as granulation, or casting techniques using wax and resin.

What will you learn on this course?

This is an opportunity for students with some previous jewellery making experience to learn some new skills, develop their own designs and make them in our fully equipped studio with the support and guidance of an artist tutor.

Improvers will be guided through a series of exercises that will teach you a range of techniques and processes to develop your existing skills. The tutor will demonstrate processes such as forming, polishing, vitreous enamelling, granulation and casting techniques using wax. You will then have the opportunity to incorporate these processes into your own designs. You will gradually be encouraged to work independently on your own projects with tutor support and guidance available as required.

Advanced students will work on individual projects at your own pace but with the knowledge that the tutor is on hand to support you in realising your designs. You can take part in the exercises to learn new techniques or refresh your knowledge if you choose. The tutor will be available to offer any advice or demonstrations you require.

All students will have access to a range of professional equipment including work benches, a soldering hearth and blowtorch, enamelling kiln, etching solutions, polishing motor and various hand tools. You should have previous experience of working with traditional jewellery making tools.

On completing the course you will have produced completed pieces of jewellery to your own design and further developed your skills and confidence in jewellery making.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ and is open to improvers and advanced students who have jewellery making experience. Improvers may have previously attended a course at mac or elsewhere and should be confident in a range of basic techniques such as soldering, filing and cutting. Advanced students will have a good working knowledge of jewellery construction and be confident working independently. All students should come with their own design ideas

The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? All tools and equipment is provided. However you will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from mac individually or in packs e.g.

Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10
Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet

Who teaches this course? Nick Greenhough

Wed 22 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 29 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 5 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 12 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 26 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 4 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 11 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 18 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 25 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Wed 1 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£154 (£140)

Jojo Rabbit

Jojo Rabbit
  • 2019
  • US
  • 1h 48min
  • 12A
  • Directed by: Taika Waititi
  • Cast: Roman Griffin Davis, Scarlett Johansson, Taika Waititi, Rebel Wilson, Thomasin McKenzie, Sam Rockwell, Stephen Merchant

Jojo (Davis) is a ten-year-old, obedient Nazi boy in WWII Germany whose mother (Johansson) is in the Resistance; Jojo reinvents Hitler (Waititi) as his oddball imaginary friend. Waititi ridicules Nazi ideology with aplomb, and as Jojo journeys towards enlightenment and reconnects with his humanity, it’s even rather beautiful.

Fri 24 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Sat 25 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Sun 26 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Mon 27 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Tue 28 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Wed 29 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Thu 30 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

Joker

Forever alone in a crowd, failed comedian Arthur Fleck seeks connection as he walks the streets of Gotham City. Arthur wears two masks – the one he paints for his day job as a clown, and the guise he projects in a futile attempt to feel like he's part of the world around him. Isolated, bullied and disregarded by society, Fleck begins a slow descent into madness as he transforms into the criminal mastermind known as the Joker.

Thu 23 Jan
Cinema

£8.50–£11.50

The Laughing Sole Comedy Club for Kids

An exciting club where the laughs are loud and shared across the ages! Compered by Barbara Nice (star of Britain's Got Talent), our comedy club is specifically for children and their families, bringing together some of the best acts on the circuit performing family jokes.

A great afternoon of comedy, perfect for family outings on a wet Sunday afternoon, children's parties and time to laugh together.

Sun 19 Apr
Foyle Studio

£7.50

Let us Sing Group Class (PE04 Spring)

This course will help you to find your voice in a group setting and project it with confidence, whether you feel you can’t sing or you're an established singer who wants to improve or gain confidence. No former musical knowledge is required. If you are interested in solo singing instead of/as well as group singing, please see the Let Us Sing Solo Class page. What will you learn on this course? The average session will include a vocal warm up, learning group songs through either lyrics or sheet music, a short break to chat to your fellow Let Us Sing members, a musical game to work on coordination and/or aural skills and a run through of the songs we have worked on. On this course you will learn how to develop your voice through: vocal exercises and warm ups; musical technique; aural perception/listening skills; as well as skills in pitch, diction and voice care. Sessions include a mixture of whole group singing, either in unison or up to 3 part harmony. At the end of each term the group songs are performed at the Let Us Sing Showcase, performing alongside the Let Us Sing Solo Class. The musical content is largely decided by the students with some songs chosen by the teacher. You will be encouraged to try a broad range of musical genres and styles. Through this course attendees develop their confidence, technical vocal skills as well as learn to care for their voice.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to adults aged 18 + for beginners with no or little formal musical knowledge or skills. Open to anyone who wants to sing in a group setting.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities. It may be less accessible for those with hearing difficulties or disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker and the room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Ideas for group songs and your own folder to collect all the course printed music sheets in. Are there any additional costs? Folder for keeping music sheets in. Who teaches this course? Roxanne Korda

Mon 20 Jan
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 27 Jan
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 3 Feb
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 10 Feb
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 24 Feb
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 2 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 9 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 16 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 23 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 30 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Let us Sing Solo Class (PE91 Spring)

This course will help you to find your voice in a solo setting and project it with confidence, whether you feel you can’t sing or you're an established singer who wants to improve or gain confidence. No former musical knowledge is required. If you are interested in group singing instead of/as well as solo singing, please see the Let Us Sing Group Class page. What will you learn on this course? The average session will include a group vocal warm up, performing and discussing solo songs through either lyrics or sheet music, a short break to chat to your fellow Let Us Sing members, a musical game to work on coordination and/or aural skills and work on a group song number. This course is designed to improve your vocal technique through: vocal exercises and warm ups; musical technique; aural perception/listening skills; as well as skills in pitch, diction and voice care. There is emphasis on solo performance technique looking at self-awareness and greater awareness of the audience. Sessions mostly focus on individual solo song work with a small amount of group singing. At the end of each term, participants choose solo pieces to perform at the Let Us Sing Showcase, performing alongside the Let Us Sing Group Class. The solo musical content is decided by the students, with some group songs chosen by the teacher embracing a broad range of musical genres and styles. Through this course attendees further develop their confidence, technical vocal skills as well as learn to care for their voice. Who is this course for? This course is open to adults aged 18 + for beginner, improver or advanced singers with no need of prior formal musical knowledge or skills. Open to anyone who wants to sing solo, to improve vocal technique and gain confidence. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. It may be less accessible for those with hearing difficulties or disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker and the room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Sheet music and/or lyrics sheets and backing tracks on a USB stick for any self-selected solo pieces. Please bring your own folder to collect all the course printed music sheets in. Are there any additional costs? A USB stick with your chosen backing tracks. Sheet music or lyrics sheets for your solo songs. Folder for keeping music sheets in. Who teaches this course? Roxanne Korda

Mon 20 Jan
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 27 Jan
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 3 Feb
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 10 Feb
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 24 Feb
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 2 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 9 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 16 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 23 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 30 Mar
Music Studio 1

£104 (£95)

Life Drawing & Painting Studio Days for Improvers

A fantastic opportunity for experienced students and artists to further their drawing and painting in response to an unclothed life model holding a whole day pose. What will you learn on this course? This is not a taught course but an opportunity for experienced students and artists to progress with their individual creative journey, while gaining confidence by relating to others in a conducive working environment. You will work directly from an unclothed professional life model who will hold a whole day pose set up by the artist tutor. We employ a range of different male and female models for our life drawing and painting courses. The artist tutor, while being available for general advice, will be teaching through demonstration, working on his own drawing and establishing an environment that enables all artists to benefit from shared concentration. At the student’s request, one-to-one support may be given to consolidate drawing skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, colour, using art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels and paint. These open studio sessions are an excellent opportunity to further your individual drawing and painting in response to a life model, gaining an insight into how the human form can be a fascinating ongoing topic for artistic study in its own right. You will be sharing a journey with artists over many centuries that have found it to be a useful discipline, complementing their other arts activities. This class includes breaks. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults and young people aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers. Anyone who is at a stage where they can work independently while benefitting from tutor led group concentration and support is welcome to attend. These open studio sessions are beneficial to students wishing to supplement basic methods and techniques taught on other courses as well as those putting together a portfolio, artists wishing to resolve works for exhibition and art teachers seeking quality creative time for themselves. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a learning support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett Quotes Working alongside other artists stimulates and provokes new ideas and ways of seeing and responding to the human form. The intense atmosphere in the sessions deepens concentration and enriches the work produced. The unique extended session allows time for contemplation of the work as it is produced and developed. The range of media employed and the rich variety of styles used by other artists informs and stimulates new ways of working. The models we work with have the skill and professionalism to provide excellent opportunities to make complex works over extended periods. Using these sessions has enabled me to develop and extend my body of work well beyond my expectations. I have used a rich and wide range of media in my work, encouraged to try new ways of working by the tutor and fellow students/artists in the sessions. The positive and encouraging way the sessions are run has increased my self-confidence and developed my own sense of being an artist.

Sun 26 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£33 (£31)

Sun 23 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£33 (£31)

Sun 29 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£33 (£31)

Life Drawing Techniques (VA11 Spring)

Working directly from a life model, be guided through set exercises and experiments to explore the different techniques that may be used to interpret the human form. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults and young people aged 18+ years. It is open students of all levels. There is an expectation that most students will have some previous experience of drawing, even if they are beginners at life drawing. However this course may also be taken as an introduction to basic drawing techniques with reference to the life model. Returners are welcome to refresh their skills or to work on independent projects with tutor feedback. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will refer to the unclothed professional life model as your subject. mac employs a range of male and female life models and each class consists mostly of a long pose, although some short poses are included. This is a weekly structured course, for those wishing to follow it, consisting of group projects. The projects will teach you drawing skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, colour and the use of art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, plus paint if students wish. At the start of each class a basic technique may be demonstrated, backed up by completed examples of the tutor’s own work or that of other artists. Working on your own drawings or paintings from the life model, the tutor will provide individual attention, and guidance encouraging you to discovering your own particular creative direction. While most of the emphasis is on individual tuition, beginners may compare notes as part of group projects. Experienced students are welcome to work independently on their life drawing projects with the knowledge that the tutor is at hand to offer guidance and help to achieve their goals. This course focuses on learning by art practice in an environment of respect for individual creative aspiration, combined with imparting definite knowledge. You can expect to progress with a basic understanding of drawing and the use of a variety of art materials. You will gain an insight into how the human form can be a fascinating ongoing topic for artistic study in its own right while sharing a journey with artists over many centuries that have found it to be a useful discipline, complementing their other arts activities. There is a short break during this class. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring some of your own materials. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Wed 22 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 29 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 5 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 12 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 26 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 4 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 11 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 18 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 25 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Wed 1 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Life Drawing (VA12 Spring)

Learn how to use scale, proportion and composition to draw the human form working directly from a life model.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to represent the human form when drawing and painting. You will be introduced to a range of techniques and materials that will allow you to explore different interpretations and styles when working from a life model.

The course covers: Drawing Techniques (Charcoal, Pencil, Pastel) Learning To Draw (Scale, Proportion, Light & Shade effects, Composition) Colour Mixing (Watercolours, Acrylic paints, Inks, Mixed media) How to ‘layer’ a painting Being Experimental

This course uses both male and female life models. The tutor sets short poses and group tasks as you learn the various techniques and develop your skills. The tutor will also set longer poses allowing you to experiment with what you have learned and begin exploring your own particular style or approach. The class includes group tuition and one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to painting and drawing or anyone who would like to learn about representing the human form from a life model.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint.

You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with.

Are there any additional costs?

Basic materials are provided but if students wish to use advanced level or specialist art materials they can bring to the class at their own cost.

Who teaches this course? Jeanette Deen

Sat 25 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 1 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 8 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 15 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 22 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 29 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 7 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 14 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 21 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 28 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Sat 4 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

MAC Young Animators Club (CSC02 Spring)

A monthly club for young animators to learn how to make stop frame animations including writing scripts, making sets and models, using specialist animation software and recording soundtracks. What will you learn on this course? Come and join the Club! This is a fun animation club run on once per month for three months (please refer to our website for the dates). Children will learn how to make their own short animated film using the stop frame animation technique. We will working as a team and participants will learn about and try every process involved in creating an animation. Each three month club will produce an animated short made by all the participants. They will start by writing a story and then break it down into a storyboard. The children will design and make their own characters and sets from coloured paper and other craft materials. Finally, using HUE animation software on laptop computers and mounted digital cameras they will take a series of still photographs that will become their animated film. During the club we will learn how to add background music, sound effects and recorded dialogue and we will investigate and try out lots of different techniques such as using coloured modelling clay, photomontage, objects in a room, little sets, or even use ourselves to create our final animated short film. In addition to learning how to make an animation, the participants will learn about team working, storytelling, listening skills and the use of specialist technology. The tutor will work closely with the groups demonstrating the different processes and supporting the children to realise their own ideas. All children will receive a copy of the finished short animated film on CD to take home. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 11 years. It is open to all ability levels and children don’t need previous animation experience. Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. The course is accessible for children of all abilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. We can provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. The room is wheelchair accessible. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and resources are provided.

Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course.

Who teaches this course? Darren Mason

Sat 25 Jan
Weston Studio

Children £57

Making Theatre Juniors (YP02 Spring)

Ever wondered what acting and being on stage is like? This fun course will teach you the skills needed to create and perform contemporary theatre.

What will you learn on this course?

This course explores contemporary approaches to creating performance. Through various theatre games and exercises young people will develop their confidence, creativity, group work, speaking, listening and performance and presentation skills.

Each term a theme is chosen and the group will create material inspired by this theme using a range of devising techniques. The students will be taught aspects of acting, rhythm, movement, physical theatre, voice, improvisation, stage presence and character development. Usually the group works towards creating a devised performance piece at the end of term.

The tutor works closely with the group to choose an appropriate theme for the performance, facilitates a range of devising exercises and tasks and teaches specific performance skills in response to the groups ideas as they evolve.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 10 to 13 years. It is open to beginners and improvers levels. Beginners will be introduced to a range of drama techniques and processes and improvers will have the opportunity to develop their existing skills and increase their confidence as performers.

Parents are not expected to accompany children on this course. All our staff are DBS checked.

Elements of this class are quite physically demanding. The course may be accessible for children with disabilities. The tutor has level 1 British Sign Language, we can provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your particular needs.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? Participants should bring bottled water or a water based drink and wear clothes suitable for movement work. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who is this course is taught by? Hailey Brown

Sat 25 Jan
Randle Studio
Sat 1 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 8 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 15 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 29 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 7 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 14 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 21 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 28 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 4 Apr
Randle Studio

Mixed Media Textiles (TE06 Spring)

Exploring processes such as batik, collage, silk, paper making and printing, this course will place an emphasis on raising surfaces and 3D elements. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people who are both completely new to textiles and those who want to extend and improve their techniques and learn new approaches to design. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as we can provide a learning support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course involves working at low tables, includes long periods of standing and good dexterity is needed in your hands. What will you learn on this course? Learn to push the boundaries of textiles, paper and stitching to construct tactile mixed media surfaces. The emphasis of this course is on experimentation, offering an opportunity to experiment with a variety of materials and techniques. You will be encouraged to try different techniques to build mixed media tactile surfaces with new and recycled materials to construct new textiles with a focus on creating tactile surfaces and 3D objects. The course may include any of the following techniques: Image Transfer Metals - Foiling Screenprinting - dye and manutex print paste Weaving - Tapestry/ Rag weaving Using Bondawab to fuse and decorate surfaces Silk papermaking Pulp papermaking Paper Lamination Faux Chenille Batik - wax resist Feltmaking Heat Fusion - using soldering and heat guns to fuse/ distort surfaces Working with modern fabric such as Lutrador Stitching - Hand or machine stitching and cording Collage / Applique Techniques Each term will focus on a different combination of the techniques listed above which can be used to develop functional and non-functional pieces. You will be supported to try out new ideas and develop your own individual projects. The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. Students will be provided with handouts for each technique and will build a personal portfolio of samples to refer to for future projects. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron and an A4 or larger ring bound sketchbook and/or plastic wallet to record what you learn and keep your samples in. All other materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? You will need to provide the items listed above at your own expense. Ring bound scrapbook approx. £8.50. Apron approx. £5.00 Who teaches this course? Claire Leggett

Thu 23 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 30 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 6 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 13 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 20 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 27 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 5 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 19 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 26 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Thu 2 Apr
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Mr. Dynamite: The Rise of James Brown

Screening to complement The Influence Project, a photography exhibition celebrating the impact of leading black musicians on contemporary sound and culture, this comprehensive documentary from Oscar winning director Alex Gibney features rare footage, interviews and photographs chronicling the ascension of the Godfather of Soul. The screening will be followed by a live onstage conversation between Birmingham saxophonist Soweto Kinch and funk legend Pee Wee Ellis, who was Brown’s former bandleader, chatting about how Ellis co-authored the first funk track and how his music became an anthem for a generation living in segregated America.

Fri 24 Jan
Theatre

£8.50–£12.50

Musical Theatre (CH18 Spring)

Re-create your favourite moments from musicals developing acting, dance and singing skills.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course, children will have the opportunity to learn many of the skills and techniques of musical theatre including dancing, acting, singing and directing. The course covers drama games, learning to read lines and using different accents, building characters, learning to develop a stage presence, learning dance routines, performing with hats and props and lots of fun and laughter.

The group will be able to choose which musicals they like and we will work on musical numbers and scenes from them.

Families and friends can attend an informal sharing in the final part of the last session in the term.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years. It is open to all ability levels and children don’t need previous experience. Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked.

The course is accessible for children of all abilities. A learning support worker is provided and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? Children to wear comfortable clothing – preferably trousers, jogging bottoms or leggings with loose fitting top and trainers or pumps. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Hailey Brown

Sat 25 Jan
Performance Studio
Sat 1 Feb
Performance Studio
Sat 8 Feb
Performance Studio
Sat 15 Feb
Performance Studio
Sat 29 Feb
Performance Studio
Sat 7 Mar
Performance Studio
Sat 14 Mar
Performance Studio
Sat 21 Mar
Performance Studio
Sat 28 Mar
Performance Studio
Sat 4 Apr
Performance Studio

Painting and Drawing Inspired by Music (VA44 Spring)

The course will explore how music can inspire visual forms in painting and drawing looking at historical examples from the Bauhaus, American Abstract Expressionism and contemporary examples to create a piece in each session. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Whether you are a complete beginner with no experience of drawing and painting to someone with professional art qualifications this course will challenge you to use music as inspiration for your visual images. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical art activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course will explore how music can inspire abstract visual forms in painting and drawing. The study of historical examples from the Bauhaus, American Abstract Expressionism and the work of contemporary artists will serve as a springboard to developing your own individual approach. You will learn to understand how visual and musical or sound forms might translate, influence and inspire each other. A variety of musical forms will be explored and on occasion a dancer may also be used. The class includes group tuition and one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. There may also be some collaborative working with other members of the class. Each class will include time to view, reflect and constructively critique your own work and that of other students on the course, done in a friendly and relaxed environment. On completion of this course you can expect to have produced several drawings and paintings. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You are encouraged to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? Any additional art materials must be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Saranjit Birdi

Mon 20 Jan
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 27 Jan
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 3 Feb
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 10 Feb
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 24 Feb
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 2 Mar
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 9 Mar
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 16 Mar
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 23 Mar
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Mon 30 Mar
Weston Studio

£137 (£125)

Pattern, Play and Make: Textile Screenprinting (TE101 Spring)

Explore the process of textile design by learning various ways to screenprint and print using heat transfer dyes in the heat press. Learn about simple repeating patterns and how to achieve them through easy hand and digital methods and print, sew and stitch to make your fabric into a bag, a cushion or a product of your choice.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to screenprint fabric using a variety of techniques for printing and patterning fabric, how to use Disperse dyes to create hand-painted, textured or cut papers to heat press fabric from, how to make stencils from a variety of materials to print through, how to translate an idea into a printable design using hand and digital methods and how to make simple repeating patterns. You will acquire knowledge of: • Printing with Procion dyes thickened with Manutuex • Printing with heat-fixable screenprint inks • Making and using permanent and impermanent stencils and masks • Using drawing fluid and screen filler • How to make a simple repeat pattern • How to manipulate a simple pattern into repeat using Photoshop on a laptop (optional) • Collaging, painting and printing with Disperse heat-reactive dyes • Print finishing techniques – curing, foil treatments and stitch options • Use of the sewing machine to make a product As the course progresses you are encouraged to work to your own project and interests applying new taught techniques each week. You will experience a variety of approaches to screenprinting using permanent and impermanent techniques, and make fabric samples which you can layer up with imagery as you develop your knowledge and experience. You will learn use of the Heat Press and a variety of methods for printing and painting with disperse dyes. The tutor will use a mix of group demonstrations, individual support and the examples from her own print design practise to guide you through the process explaining the materials and teaching the printing techniques. You will receive individual support on your designs and how to realise your ideas as required. On completion of this course you can expect to leave with a selection of screen printed samples and fabric designs and a finished product. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years and is open to beginners. You don’t need any previous experience of screenprinting as full instruction and guidance is given, however you should have a keen interest in drawing and textiles.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Bring in inspiring sources to work from such as sketchbooks, photographs and images.

You should wear old clothes and bring an apron to work in.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs.

Who teaches this course? Claire Leggett

Tue 21 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 28 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 4 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 11 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 18 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 25 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 3 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 17 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 24 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Tue 31 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Photosocial: Photographers Group (DM22 Spring)

A general interest group for photography enthusiasts to share their skills, knowledge and passion for taking photographs.

What will you learn on this course? This course is a weekly opportunity for anyone with a general interest in photography to get together with other enthusiasts in the company of our Artist Tutor Kate Green. It’s a flexible, general interest group that might motivate you to pick up your camera a little bit more and inspire new ideas, skills, approaches and creativity. If you enjoy working on your own photography projects, discussing or sharing your work and thoughts, looking at other photographers work, creating photo books and developing you knowledge and skills along the way then this group is for you. The tutor will be on hand to facilitate group sharing and learning rather than it being a tutor led session. The course could also include visits out within the local area or into the city to suit participant’s interests in architectural, urban or street photography. The course is based in mac’s media studio which has Apple mac computers. These can be used for designing photo books and post-production. This course is ideal for students that have completed introductory courses such as mac’s Exposure I & II, people who know their way around their camera but still want to enjoy the social aspect and creative energy of being part of a group with shared interests. On completion of this course you will have enjoyed sharing your enthusiasm for photography with others and you should feel inspired to be creative with your camera and want to explore your own capabilities further.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers and people with a general interest in photography who wish to share that with others. It is ideally suited to people who have completed mac’s Exposure I & II Digital Photography courses.

This course is probably more suited to people with DSLR or Bridge cameras. If you have a basic compact point and shoot camera but are thinking of upgrading then we do have a limited number of Digital SLR’s that can be borrowed during the class.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a camera and a computer. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Bring along your camera, a tripod if you have one and appropriate clothing for going outside.

You can bring your own laptops or tablets if you wish but please remember any cables you might need to connect your camera to your device. It is also useful if you bring a copy of your camera manual.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Kate Green

Mon 20 Jan
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 27 Jan
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 3 Feb
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 10 Feb
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 24 Feb
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 2 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 9 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 16 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 23 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 30 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Photosocial: Photographers Group Evening Session (DM101 Spring)

A general interest group for photography enthusiasts to share their skills, knowledge and passion for taking photographs.

What will you learn on this course? This course is a weekly opportunity for anyone with a general interest in photography to get together with other enthusiasts in the company of our Artist Tutor Kate Green. It’s a flexible, general interest group that might motivate you to pick up your camera a little bit more and inspire new ideas, skills, approaches and creativity. If you enjoy working on your own photography projects, discussing or sharing your work and thoughts, looking at other photographers work, creating photo books and developing you knowledge and skills along the way then this group is for you. The tutor will be on hand to facilitate group sharing and learning rather than it being a tutor led session. The course could also include visits out within the local area or into the city to suit participant’s interests in architectural, urban or street photography. The course is based in mac’s media studio which has Apple mac computers. These can be used for designing photo books and post-production. This course is ideal for students that have completed introductory courses such as mac’s Exposure I & II, people who know their way around their camera but still want to enjoy the social aspect and creative energy of being part of a group with shared interests. On completion of this course you will have enjoyed sharing your enthusiasm for photography with others and you should feel inspired to be creative with your camera and want to explore your own capabilities further.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers and people with a general interest in photography who wish to share that with others. It is ideally suited to people who have completed mac’s Exposure I & II Digital Photography courses.

This course is probably more suited to people with DSLR or Bridge cameras. If you have a basic compact point and shoot camera but are thinking of upgrading then we do have a limited number of Digital SLR’s that can be borrowed during the class.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a camera and a computer. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Bring along your camera, a tripod if you have one and appropriate clothing for going outside.

You can bring your own laptops or tablets if you wish but please remember any cables you might need to connect your camera to your device. It is also useful if you bring a copy of your camera manual.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Kate Green

Mon 20 Jan
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 27 Jan
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 3 Feb
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 10 Feb
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 24 Feb
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 2 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 9 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 16 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 23 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Mon 30 Mar
Deloitte Room

£136 (£124)

Pilates Beginners (WB08 Spring)

Learn the technique of Pilates which combines strength, stretching, breathing and balance to focus upon developing flexibility and posture. What will you learn on this course? Pilates is a total mind and body conditioning method suitable for everyone regardless of age and fitness level. On this course you will be introduced to Classical Mat exercises that will develop a foundation understanding of Pilates. It will build strength and flexibility through considered and corrective movement patterns and exercises. It will give you an understanding of Pilates terminology and theory as well as improving your own body awareness. The class will progress you from fundamentals through to more complex and demanding exercises that will continue to challenge and progress your body. Pilates, the workout choice for dancers, gymnasts and fitness enthusiasts, is a proven method that has the potential to transform your life through corrective movement. Pilates exercises are designed to give you strength, suppleness, grace and skill – which will be reflected in the way you walk, play and work. Muscular imbalances or the way in which we move can lead to pain and injury. By targeting the deep abdominal and spinal muscles, Pilates aims to improve the overall core stability and posture and correct the muscle imbalances through exercise. Pilates can make you look and feel better. It relieves stress and tension and promotes a feeling of well-being while expanding body awareness. You can expect to develop better posture and muscle tone. These classes are delivered in a warm friendly way aimed at educating you about your bodies and gradually introducing new exercises as the course progresses. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is suitable for beginners and you don’t need any previous experience of Pilates. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You must be able to lie down on a mat on your front and back. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. If you suffer from a medical condition we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing any physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems or injuries. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring water and wear comfortable clothes to move in preferably tight fitting so that the instructor can correct where appropriate. This class will be taken in bare feet. You must bring your own Pilates mat and you may like to bring a small cushion or towel to act as a head support. The additional equipment listed below would also be very beneficial and allow you to get much more out of your Pilates workout. • Medium – Pilates Band for muscle toning and stretching approx. £3.99 • 22cm diameter Soft Ball – inflatable Pilates ball approx. £3.99 • Pilates Head Block – to raise the head in reclining postures for correct alignment approx. £2.49 • All items are available from online retailers. Please contact us for more information. • A Pilates mat (approx. £15) along with any of the optional equipment listed above must be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Sam McBride

Tue 21 Jan
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 28 Jan
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 4 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 11 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 25 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 3 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 10 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 17 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 24 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tue 31 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Pilates Improvers (WB23 Spring)

For those wanting a greater challenge or for people looking to progress from Beginner Pilates, this will introduce more challenging and technical exercises for the Classical Mat repertoire. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is suitable for people who are looking to challenge themselves with more demanding Pilates exercises. It is not necessary to have completed the Beginner mat although this would be an advantage. For those with no previous Pilates experience then a good level of health and fitness is advised as the Intermediate exercises are both physically and technically challenging. Accessibility The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You must be able to lie down on a mat on your front and back. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. If you suffer from a medical condition we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing any physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. What will you learn on this course? The Intermediate mat will expand your Pilates understanding through exercises that will test your body awareness and your physical conditioning while improving your core stability, posture and correcting muscular imbalances. The classes will introduce and build on technical skills as well as challenging you through more athletic exercises at an increased pace. Pilates, the workout choice for dancers, gymnasts and fitness enthusiasts, is a proven method that has the potential to transform your life through corrective movement. Pilates exercises are designed to give you strength, suppleness, grace and skill – which will be reflected in the way you walk, play and work. Muscular imbalances or the way in which we move can lead to pain and injury. By targeting the deep abdominal and spinal muscles, Pilates aims to improve the overall core stability and posture and correct the muscle imbalances through exercise. Pilates can make you look and feel better. It relieves stress and tension and promotes a feeling of well-being while expanding body awareness. You can expect to develop better posture and muscle tone. These classes are delivered in a warm friendly way aimed at educating you about your bodies and gradually introducing new exercises as the course progresses. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring water and wear comfortable clothes to move in preferably tight fitting so that the instructor can correct where appropriate. This class will be taken in bare feet. You must bring your own Pilates mat and you may like to bring a small cushion or towel to act as a head support. The additional equipment listed below would also be very beneficial and allow you to get much more out of your Pilates workout. • Medium – Pilates Band for muscle toning and stretching approx. £3.99 • 22cm diameter Soft Ball – inflatable Pilates ball approx. £3.99 • Pilates Head Block – to raise the head in reclining postures for correct alignment approx. £2.49 • All items are available from online retailers. Please contact us for more information. Are there any additional costs? • A Pilates mat (approx. £15) along with any of the optional equipment listed above must be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Sam McBride

Tue 21 Jan
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 25 Feb
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 3 Mar
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Performance Studio

£96.50 (£89.50)

Play Dhol Drum (MU102 Spring)

Learn the techniques and rhythms of the traditional Punjabi Dhol drum. This course is delivered in partnership with Services For Education. What will you learn on this course?

Learn to play and perform the Punjabi Dhol drum through a structured, professional environment through a set syllabus with a wide range of traditional and Western beats.

In these sessions you will be taught by highly experienced tutor Harjit Singh with over 30 years of experience in teaching and performing Punjabi Folk music.

The course tuition is provided by the Head of Percussion & World Music from the multi-award-winning Services for Education Music Service in partnership with MAC Birmingham. In 2018/19, the Music Service’s Azaad Dhol Group, directed by Harjit performed at the Royal Albert Hall, Symphony Hall, ICC, Royal Birmingham Conservatoire and Ruddock Performing Arts Centre.

We provide Dhol tuition in a fun, friendly and creative environment where you will learn and develop basic and specific techniques using the Dagga and Tilli. Opportunities for performance and grades will be offered throughout the course, and both traditional Bhangra and classical beats will be taught.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to participants aged 8+ to adults for beginners and improvers to advanced level of playing and performing. Whether you are someone that has never played the Dhol before or want to gain further skills and qualifications then this is the course for you.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You need good upper body and manual dexterity. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker and the room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Dhol drums and beaters can be provided for the sessions and you are welcome to bring your own instruments. Are there any additional costs? No Who teaches this course? Harjit Singh on behalf the Services for Education Music Service.

Tue 21 Jan
Music Studio 5
Tue 28 Jan
Music Studio 5
Tue 4 Feb
Music Studio 5
Tue 11 Feb
Music Studio 5
Tue 25 Feb
Music Studio 5
Tue 3 Mar
Music Studio 5
Tue 10 Mar
Music Studio 5
Tue 17 Mar
Music Studio 5
Tue 24 Mar
Music Studio 5
Tue 31 Mar
Music Studio 5

Play Dhol Drum (MU102 Spring)

Dhol Drum Learn the techniques and rhythms of the traditional Punjabi Dhol drum. We provide the drums and beaters so you can get started straight away on your Dhol drum journey. You will be taught and guided by two Dhol Drum expert tutors in partnership with Services For Education. What will you learn on this course?

Learn to play and perform the Punjabi Dhol drum through a structured, professional environment through a set syllabus with a wide range of traditional and Western beats.

In these sessions you will be taught by highly experienced tutor Harjit Singh with over 30 years of experience in teaching and performing Punjabi Folk music.

The course tuition is provided by the Head of Percussion & World Music from the multi-award-winning Services for Education Music Service in partnership with MAC Birmingham. In 2018/19, the Music Service’s Azaad Dhol Group, directed by Harjit performed at the Royal Albert Hall, Symphony Hall, ICC, Royal Birmingham Conservatoire and Ruddock Performing Arts Centre.

We provide Dhol tuition in a fun, friendly and creative environment where you will learn and develop basic and specific techniques using the Dagga and Tilli. Opportunities for performance and grades will be offered throughout the course, and both traditional Bhangra and classical beats will be taught.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to participants aged 18+ and is suitable for beginners and improvers. Whether you are someone that has never played the Dhol before or want to gain further skills and qualifications then this is the course for you.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You need good upper body and manual dexterity. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker and the room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? We will provide Dhol drums and beaters for the sessions, but you are welcome to bring your own instruments. Are there any additional costs? No Who teaches this course? Harjit Singh and Jagdev Saini on behalf of Services for Education Music Service.

Tue 21 Jan
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 28 Jan
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 4 Feb
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 11 Feb
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 25 Feb
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 3 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 10 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 17 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 24 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Tue 31 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Play Steel Pan Drums (MU103 Spring)

★★★ update ★★★ Parent can now book with their child ★★★

Learn the techniques and rhythms of the Caribbean Steel Pans in this fun weekly course. What will you learn on this course?

Learn to play a progressive series of Caribbean and popular pieces on the Steel Pans. This introductory course will involve rhythmic and melodic techniques, playing steel pan in a group. There will be performances and an end of term sharing event at MAC.

The course tuition is provided by a highly trained and experienced tutor from the multi-award-winning Services for Education Music Service in partnership with MAC Birmingham. In 2018/19, Steel Bands from the Music Service performed at the Symphony Hall, Royal Birmingham Conservatoire, MAC (as part of the 2019 Windrush Festival) and Ruddock Performing Arts Centre.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to participants aged 8 to adults and no previous experience needed. Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All staff are DBS checked and trained in Safeguarding.

The course is accessible for children of all abilities who can participate in activities that use upper body and manual dexterity. MAC can provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. The room is wheelchair accessible. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Do you need to bring anything? No. Steel pans, sticks, music and music stands are all provided. Are there any additional costs? No Who teaches this course? Services For Education

Sat 25 Jan
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 1 Feb
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 8 Feb
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 15 Feb
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 29 Feb
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 7 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 14 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 21 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 28 Mar
Music Studio 5

£99

Sat 4 Apr
Music Studio 5

£99

Play Steel Pan Drums (MU104 Spring)

Learn the techniques and rhythms of the Caribbean Steel Pans in this fun weekly course. What will you learn on this course?

Learn to play a progressive series of Caribbean and popular pieces on the Steel Pans. This introductory course will involve rhythmic and melodic techniques, playing steel pan in a group. There will be performances and an end of term sharing event at MAC.

The course tuition is provided by a highly trained and experienced tutor from the multi-award-winning Services for Education Music Service in partnership with MAC Birmingham. In 2018/19, Steel Bands from the Music Service performed at the Symphony Hall, Royal Birmingham Conservatoire, MAC (as part of the 2019 Windrush Festival) and Ruddock Performing Arts Centre.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to adults aged 18+ and no previous experience is needed.
The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but will require some manual dexterity. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? No. Steel pans, sticks, music and music stands are all provided. Are there any additional costs? No Who teaches this course? Services For Education

Sat 25 Jan
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 1 Feb
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 8 Feb
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 15 Feb
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 29 Feb
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 7 Mar
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 14 Mar
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 21 Mar
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 28 Mar
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Sat 4 Apr
Music Studio 5

£106.50

Pottery Club (CH06 Spring)

Join the Pottery Club and explore the world of clay, learn all about different hand–building techniques and imaginative ways to decorate your clay creations.

What will you learn on this course?

The pottery club is a fun and creative environment which will encourage children’s creativity and discovery. The course provides an exciting introduction to ceramics where children get to explore the medium of clay with a group of like-minded people. Children will learn different hand-building techniques such as coiling, slab building and sculpting clay. They will then add decoration using a variety of glaze techniques. Learners will be encouraged to review and refine their work to produce finished ceramic pieces that are unique and of a high standard. The tutor will demonstrate each different technique, encouraging the children to apply the techniques in the creation of their own collection of work, suggesting possible outcomes, depending on the age and ability of the children. Further demonstrations and 1-2-1 support will be given as required as the children progress. All learners will be able to work at their own pace. Class members will be encouraged to share their work and ideas with the group. A glossary of technical terms and a hand out sheet summarising what has been covered throughout the course will be provided. In addition to practical making skills the tutor will use visual resources such as ceramics magazines and books to give you an understanding of both historical and contemporary ceramic artist’s work. By the end of this course the children will have learned how to use all the equipment in the ceramic studio safely and correctly. They will have learned a range of techniques, explored their creative potential and made high quality ceramic pieces of their own design. Finished glazed ceramic creations will be ready to collect from Mac two to four weeks later to allow time for firing to take place. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 11. It is open to all levels. Those with little or no experience of pottery will be shown demonstrations for the various techniques used and those with previous experience will be able to self-direct their work with guidance from the tutor.

All our staff are DBS checked.

The course is accessible for children with disabilities but you do need dexterity in your hands to work with clay. A Carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work.

Who teaches this course? Olga Terry

Sat 25 Jan
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 1 Feb
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 8 Feb
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 15 Feb
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 29 Feb
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 7 Mar
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 14 Mar
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 21 Mar
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 28 Mar
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Sat 4 Apr
Pottery Studio

Children £129

Practical Visual Enquiry (VA01 Spring)

These project-based classes will inspire your creative thinking and develop your painting, drawing and mixed media skills. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners may be completely new to drawing and painting or may not have done it for some time. They will be offered an introduction to drawing and painting methods. Improvers and advanced students may have previously completed courses at mac or elsewhere and will benefit from an opportunity to develop their skills further with individual support from the artist tutor. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn creative painting, drawing and mixed-media techniques through a project-based programme of classes. The initial weeks of a project usually include some whole-group tutor-led discussions and demonstrations relevant to the project. Otherwise teaching is one-to-one and tailored to your needs, with students working more independently as the term progresses. You will be guided according to your own level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. Individual projects may involve studying a particular artist, artistic style or movement in art history. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. You will be encouraged to undertake independent research to inform and widen the scope of your work. Students are encouraged to look at and discuss each other’s work informally throughout the term. There is a whole-group review at the end of term and you will learn a great deal from other members of the group. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several paintings and drawings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research in their sketchbook. You can expect to have gained skills and confidence and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. This is a three hour class and includes a break. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Helen Tarr

Mon 20 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 27 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 3 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 10 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 24 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 2 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 9 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 16 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 23 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 30 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Public Speaking (PE05 Spring)

Learn how to improve your confidence and assertiveness in public speaking.

What will you learn on this course?

Have you ever felt like the ground was ready to swallow you up? Improve your confidence and assertiveness in public speaking skills and benefit from group and one to one tuition. This course is tailored for individuals wishing to develop their personal and/or professional development.

An audience will be invited to an end of term presentation.

Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all who feel they need to improve their public speaking skills.

The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring water and wear loose comfortable clothes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Kirsty Mitchell

Wed 22 Jan
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 29 Jan
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 5 Feb
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 12 Feb
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 26 Feb
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 4 Mar
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 11 Mar
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 18 Mar
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 25 Mar
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Wed 1 Apr
English Studio

£90 (£82)

Reading Group (WR101 Spring)

Love reading? Then this course is for you. Designed for anyone who enjoys reading, enjoys talking about reading, whether it be the latest blockbuster, an old novel, a poem or a piece of writing found somewhere, sometime and would like to meet other people who also love reading and talking about what they read Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to everyone who has an interest in reading. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? Carol Preston is a highly experienced creative writer and will help the Reading Group discover new reading material and help to facilitate a lively, engaging, thoughtful and informal setting to discuss your mutual love of literature. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs apart from the reading material you choose to discuss Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 20 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 27 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 3 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 10 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 24 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 2 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 9 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 16 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 23 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 30 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Relaxed Drama with Open Theatre (PE101 Spring)

Fun creative drama sessions for 8-13 year olds on the autistic spectrum or similar run by Open Theatre Company. What will you learn on this course? Creative drama sessions for 8-13 year olds on the autistic spectrum or similar! Sessions will be fun and engaging – bringing out and exploring those hidden abilities for improvising and performing – exploring all kinds of interesting and amusing situations and characters. We won’t be working with scripts but will make up our own stories and tales with lots of music and colourful props.

The Open Theatre Company programme directly engages children and young people with learning disabilities in its theatre practice ‘shystering’ as a transformatory tool that develops and enhances their creative and life skills. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for 8 to 13 years. It is open to all ability levels so is suited to beginners with no previous performance experience, the class will be tailored to the participant’s abilities. All our staff are DBS checked. The course is accessible for children and young people with disabilities and the classes are adapted to meet the specific needs of the group. The room is wheelchair accessible and the courses are open to siblings and carers. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? Participants will need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the session. Lessons may be done bare footed. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. The ticket is for one family unit (one child on the autistic spectrum or similar, accompanied by one parent or carer plus one sibling). Who teaches this course? Richard Hayhow Open Theatre

Wed 22 Jan
English Studio
Wed 29 Jan
English Studio
Wed 5 Feb
English Studio
Wed 12 Feb
English Studio
Wed 26 Feb
English Studio
Wed 4 Mar
English Studio
Wed 11 Mar
English Studio
Wed 18 Mar
English Studio
Wed 25 Mar
English Studio
Wed 1 Apr
English Studio

Relief Printmaking (VA14 Spring)

Learn a variety of relief printmaking techniques that don’t require a press. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. For people with no previous experience up to those who have done some simple printing (for instance at school) or have already undertaken a press based print course but would like to learn techniques they are able to do at home without access to a press. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Participants will need to have good manual dexterity and reasonable strength in their arms to apply pressure. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn a range of relief printmaking methods and techniques that do not require the use of a press. All of the equipment and materials are readily available so you will be able to continue using the skills learned on this course to make prints at home should you desire. We will explore how to make stamps from a selection of everyday materials and learn the following techniques and processes: Monotypes Collagraphs Lino Cuts Wood Block printing both reduction cut and multiple block Mixing and overlaying inks Understanding different types of ink and papers You will be using a range of specialist equipment such as lino and wood cut tools, craft knives, acrylic sheets, print rollers, bench hooks and working with oil based inks. Forward planning and a certain amount of lateral thinking is required in printmaking as the printed image is often created by building up several layers. The tutor will begin the course with demonstrations of different techniques and some group projects to practice these. Eventually you will be encouraged to work on your own individual projects with guidance and support as required. On completion of this course you can expect to have the skills and confidence to continue to work at home on your own printmaking projects and have a collection of samples and artworks demonstrating the techniques you have learned. This is a three hour class and includes a break. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring a sketchbook and a waterproof apron. If you have particularly sensitive skin you may wish to use a barrier cream or bring thin latex gloves. All other materials and resources are provided. Are there any additional costs? Only the cost of an apron (£5 approx.) and a sketchbook (£5 approx.) Who teaches this course? Sarah Moss

Thu 23 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 30 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 6 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 13 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 27 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 5 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 12 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 19 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 26 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

Thu 2 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£153.50 (£140.50)

See it, Draw it, Paint it! (VA02 Spring)

Learn basic skills such as drawing and colour mixing and explore ways of recording through observation and imagination. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels from beginners who may be completely new to drawing and painting or anyone who would like to improve their observational drawing and painting skills. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course will explore the basic skills of drawing and painting through an investigation of how we see our environment and how we choose to represent it. You will learn to use a range of art materials and a variety of techniques required to capture what you see on paper. This course should equip you with the skills required to begin to develop your own individual artistic style and approach. The course covers: Observational Drawing: Charcoal Pencil Pastel Observational Painting: Inks Acrylics Watercolour Mixed media Painting techniques including: layering of paint composition colour mixing use of colour You will learn these techniques by drawing and painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and abstracts. This course is also about learning to look, how we see our environment and seeing the qualities we want to represent visually. You will explore ways of recording what you see through observation and imagination. During the first half of the term new techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several finished drawings and paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in art techniques and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, masking tape, acrylic paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Louise Blakeway

Mon 20 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 27 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 3 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 10 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 24 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 2 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 9 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 16 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 23 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Mon 30 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£125 (£114)

Short Takes: The Art of Short Film Making (DM10 Spring)

Learn the techniques of film making and develop your own ideas, whilst receiving input from BAFTA award-winner Michael Clifford. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for those who are completely new to film making and those with some existing skills, including those who have attended this course before. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you all the necessary skills to make a short film. You will experience the entire process from developing ideas, writing a script, producing, directing, filming and editing. You will work with mac’s professional Sony cameras and specialist sound recording equipment and learn to edit your film on Apple Mac computers in mac’s dedicated media studio. The classes are taught through demonstrations and guidance from the tutor, an award winning film maker and through hands on experience or learning by doing. You will work in small groups so this course is also a great way to build your confidence and people skills while meeting like-minded people. The course usually consists of making a trailer for a film followed by a short drama and/or a short documentary film. Where students have the availability and equipment themselves they will be invited to take part in a '48hr Film Challenge', which takes place outside of the normal hours of the course. Please note that this event is extra to the course and not supervised. On completing this course you can expect to have developed your confidence in and understanding of the film making process and produced your own short film. Do you need to bring anything? Students should bring a usb stick or portable drive with plenty of storage in order to take their projects home. Mac cameras and computers are provided whilst on site only. If you wish to film off site you will need your own equipment. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Michael Clifford

Wed 22 Jan
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 29 Jan
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 5 Feb
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 12 Feb
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 26 Feb
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 4 Mar
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 11 Mar
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 18 Mar
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 25 Mar
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

Wed 1 Apr
Media Studio

£137 (£125)

The Songwriting Circle (MU01 Spring)

No knowledge of music theory is needed for this creative network where like-minded folks meet and share ideas. "… similar to the creative buzz and team spirit of being in a band, but for grown-ups and without the long journeys to gigs in a transit van". Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. You can be an experienced songwriter looking for new ways to generate ideas or someone just starting out on their song writing journey. The course is accessible for people with disabilities and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course is a series of workshops that encourages songwriters to come out of isolation and enter a creative community based on peer-to-peer learning. This is a safe place and a hideaway from the commercial world, somewhere you can develop skills, share experiences, receive feedback and feel the benefit of a support network. The Songwriting Circle is not an academic course and you do not need to have any knowledge of music theory or necessarily be able to play a musical instrument. It's a creative network of writers, a place for like-minded people to meet and share ideas. It is designed to stimulate and motivate your creative spirit. It involves participants playing their works in progress and receiving feedback from the group. The Songwriting Circle was set up by singer songwriter Dan Whitehouse in 2010, inspired by a songwriting retreat he undertook with Tom Robinson (BBC 6 Music). Dan leads the majority of the sessions, with sessional support from other songwriters: Jonny Amos, Michael Clarke, Helen Bentley, Heather Wastie, Tony Wille, and James Stanley. This multi-led approach offers participants the opportunity to share a balanced perspective and vast array of songwriting techniques and approaches. At the end of every term there is a showcase event at mac‘s Hexagon Theatre where every participant has the opportunity to perform a song to a public audience. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Nicole Justice and other sessional support.

Mon 20 Jan
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 27 Jan
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 3 Feb
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 10 Feb
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 24 Feb
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 2 Mar
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 9 Mar
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 16 Mar
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 23 Mar
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

Mon 30 Mar
Music Studio 5

£102 (£93)

The Songwriting Circle (MU02 Spring)

No knowledge of music theory is needed for this creative network where like-minded folks meet and share ideas. "… similar to the creative buzz and team spirit of being in a band, but for grown-ups and without the long journeys to gigs in a transit van". Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. You can be an experienced songwriter looking for new ways to generate ideas or someone just starting out on their song writing journey. The course is accessible for people with disabilities and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course is a series of workshops that encourages songwriters to come out of isolation and enter a creative community based on peer-to-peer learning. This is a safe place and a hideaway from the commercial world, somewhere you can develop skills, share experiences, receive feedback and feel the benefit of a support network. The Songwriting Circle is not an academic course and you do not need to have any knowledge of music theory or necessarily be able to play a musical instrument. It's a creative network of writers, a place for like-minded people to meet and share ideas. It is designed to stimulate and motivate your creative spirit. It involves participants playing their works in progress and receiving feedback from the group. The Songwriting Circle was set up by singer songwriter Dan Whitehouse in 2010, inspired by a songwriting retreat he undertook with Tom Robinson (BBC 6 Music). Dan leads the majority of the sessions, with sessional support from other songwriters: Jonny Amos, Michael Clarke, Helen Bentley, Heather Wastie, Tony Wille, and James Stanley. This multi-led approach offers participants the opportunity to share a balanced perspective and vast array of songwriting techniques and approaches. At the end of every term there is a showcase event at mac‘s Hexagon Theatre where every participant has the opportunity to perform a song to a public audience. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Tony Wille and other sessional support.

Wed 22 Jan
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 29 Jan
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 5 Feb
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 12 Feb
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 26 Feb
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 4 Mar
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 11 Mar
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 18 Mar
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 25 Mar
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Wed 1 Apr
Deloitte Room

£102 (£93)

Stained Glass Beginners (VA90 Spring)

Learn the techniques of copper foiled (tiffany) stained glass including glass cutting, grinding and soldering. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of stained glass as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills and develop new techniques and ideas. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as carer or support worker may attend and the room is wheelchair accessible. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course demands dexterity and strength in your hands. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the techniques of copper foiled (Tiffany) stained glass. You will be taught all the skills to create a finished piece of stained glass including: glass cutting, grinding, foiling, taping, soldering and finishing. After completing a starter piece to learn these basic skills you will begin to work on your own project. The tutor will teach you how to translate your ideas into stained glass designs and support you as you realise your individual projects. You will learn how to safely use the specialist equipment and materials that are involved in the stained glass making process such as glass cutters, grinders, soldering irons, flux, patina and lead. By the end of this course you will have produced starter piece and a piece of stained glass of your own design. Do you need to bring anything? All equipment is provided along with materials to make your starter piece. You will need to provide your own glass and solder for your individual project. Are there any additional costs? Glass and solder for your individual project must be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Clare Wainwright

Mon 20 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 27 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 3 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 10 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 24 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 2 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 9 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 16 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 23 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Mon 30 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Stained Glass Beginners (VA91 Spring)

Learn the techniques of copper foiled (tiffany) stained glass including glass cutting, grinding and soldering. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of stained glass as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills and develop new techniques and ideas. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as carer or support worker may attend and the room is wheelchair accessible. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course demands dexterity and strength in your hands. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the techniques of copper foiled (Tiffany) stained glass. You will be taught all the skills to create a finished piece of stained glass including: glass cutting, grinding, foiling, taping, soldering and finishing. After completing a starter piece to learn these basic skills you will begin to work on your own project. The tutor will teach you how to translate your ideas into stained glass designs and support you as you realise your individual projects. You will learn how to safely use the specialist equipment and materials that are involved in the stained glass making process such as glass cutters, grinders, soldering irons, flux, patina and lead. By the end of this course you will have produced starter piece and a piece of stained glass of your own design. Do you need to bring anything? All equipment is provided along with materials to make your starter piece. You will need to provide your own glass and solder for your individual project. Are there any additional costs? Glass and solder for your individual project must be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Clare Wainwright

Mon 20 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 27 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 3 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 10 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 24 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 2 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 9 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 16 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 23 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 30 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Stained Glass for Beginners & Improvers (VA101 Spring)

Learn the techniques of copper foiled (tiffany) stained glass including glass cutting, grinding and soldering. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of stained glass as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills and develop new techniques and ideas. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as carer or support worker may attend and the room is wheelchair accessible. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course demands dexterity and strength in your hands. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the techniques of copper foiled (Tiffany) stained glass. You will be taught all the skills to create a finished piece of stained glass including: glass cutting, grinding, foiling, taping, soldering and finishing. After completing a starter piece to learn these basic skills you will begin to work on your own project. The tutor will teach you how to translate your ideas into stained glass designs and support you as you realise your individual projects. You will learn how to safely use the specialist equipment and materials that are involved in the stained glass making process such as glass cutters, grinders, soldering irons, flux, patina and lead. By the end of this course you will have produced starter piece and a piece of stained glass of your own design. Do you need to bring anything? All equipment is provided along with materials to make your starter piece. You will need to provide your own glass and solder for your individual project. Are there any additional costs? Glass and solder for your individual project must be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Clare Wainwright

Wed 22 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 29 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 5 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 12 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 26 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 4 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 11 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 18 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 25 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Wed 1 Apr
Sculpture Studion

£162 (£147)

Stained Glass for Improvers

Clare Wainwright Course Description

Stained Glass Studio for Improvers

Explore your own projects and ideas to extend your stained glass knowledge or simply spend a relaxing day being creative in the studio. Artist Tutor Claire Wainwright will be on hand to offer help and guidance.

What will you learn? The tutor will support you to translate your ideas into stained glass designs and offer advice and guidance on appropriate techniques. You should have existing skills including glass cutting, grinding, foiling, taping, soldering and finishing. It is expected that you will also be how to safely use the specialist equipment and materials that are involved in the stained glass making process such as glass cutters, grinders, soldering irons, flux, patina and lead. The day is for improver and advanced level students only who wish to work on their own projects and those wishing to develop their skills and refining techniques so you can create more complex and sophisticated work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers and advanced students. You should have attended MAC’s ‘Stained Glass Beginners’ course or have some previous experience of working with stained glass. Students are expected to be familiar with basic techniques of copper foiled stained glass. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as carer or support worker may attend, and the room is wheelchair accessible. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course demands dexterity and strength in your hands. Do you need to bring anything? You will need to provide your own glass and solder for your individual project. Are there any additional costs? Glass and solder for your individual project must be provided at your own expense.

Who teaches this course? Clare Wainwright

Sun 26 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£44 (£41)

Sun 17 May
Sculpture Studion

£44 (£41)

Stained Glass for Improvers & Advanced (VA85 Spring)

Design and make your own copper foiled stained glass pieces on this course for students with some previous experience. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers and advanced students. You should have attended mac’s ‘Stained Glass Beginners’ course or have some previous experience of working with stained glass. Students are expected to be familiar with basic techniques of copper foiled stained glass. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as carer or support worker may attend, and the room is wheelchair accessible. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course demands dexterity and strength in your hands. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will have the opportunity to design and realize your own copper foiled stained glass projects. The tutor will support you to translate your ideas into stained glass designs and offer advice and guidance on appropriate techniques. You should have existing skills including glass cutting, grinding, foiling, taping, soldering and finishing. It is expected that you will also be how to safely use the specialist equipment and materials that are involved in the stained glass making process such as glass cutters, grinders, soldering irons, flux, patina and lead. This course encourages students to work on independent projects, developing existing skills and refining your technique to create more complex and sophisticated work. Do you need to bring anything? All equipment is provided along with materials to make your starter piece. You will need to provide your own glass and solder for your individual project. Are there any additional costs? Glass and solder for your individual project must be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Clare Wainwright

Mon 20 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 27 Jan
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 3 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 10 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 24 Feb
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 2 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 9 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 16 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 23 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Mon 30 Mar
Sculpture Studion

£169.50 (£154.50)

Stand Up Comedy (PE03 Spring)

Develop your own stand–up comedy act with the option to perform before a paying audience. What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you how to approach developing a stand-up comedy routine. You learn a number of techniques to help unlock your creativity and generate ideas. The course covers practical ways in which to turn these ideas into stand-up comedy such as joke writing. Much of the course will be taught through games and exercises in groups of different sizes. You will also learn how to develop a ‘routine’ or comedy act including how to present your present yourself on stage. This will cover both performance practice and public speaking skills and memory aids. The tutor will provide individual support on your act. This course is a great way to meet new people, have a laugh and develop your confidence. Due to the nature of this course some of the content produced may contain language some people may find offensive. On completion of this course you can expect to have produced a 5 minute stand-up comedy routine and there will be an opportunity for all participants to perform their act to a paying audience in a special showcase event in one of mac’s performance spaces. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. You don’t need any previous comedy experience as full instruction and guidance is given. This course is ideal for those interested in having a go at writing jokes and telling them to an audience. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by a support worker or a carer if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a note book and something to write with. All other materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Karen Bayley

Mon 20 Jan
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 27 Jan
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 3 Feb
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 10 Feb
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 24 Feb
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 2 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 9 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 16 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 23 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Mon 30 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Tai Chi Beginners (WB30 Spring)

Learn the basics of Tai Chi and increase your flexibility and suppleness while experiencing meditation in movement. Who is this course for? This beginners course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have no prior experience of Tai Chi or anyone who hasn’t undertaken Tai Chi for a number of years. Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with limited mobility as they can sit down to do some of the exercises and movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. What will you learn on this course? Tai Chi is a Chinese exercise system and martial art. It has been called meditation in movement and people come to Tai Chi for a variety of reasons including relaxation and to improve their balance and health. There are different styles of Tai Chi. On this course you will learn the Chen Man Ching form (sequence of 37 moves) which was adapted from the Yang Form (108 moves) in order to meet the need of people in the West who had less time to commit to practice. It is very soft and less overtly martial than other styles. You will be introduced to basic Tai Chi stances and exercises and learn how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner. Most classes will start with loosening exercises, then you will learn a move or two from the Chen Man Ching form and the class will end with some Chi Gung breathing exercises. In addition you may also do some individual and partnered exercises including Tai Chi walking and push hands. On completion of this course participants will have learnt the first third of the Chen Man Ching form. The remaining two thirds of the form are taught in the Improvers class which students can join on the tutor’s invitation. Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Phil Shelton

Wed 22 Jan
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 29 Jan
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 5 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 12 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 26 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 4 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 11 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 18 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 25 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 1 Apr
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Tai Chi Improvers (WB03 Spring)

Deepen your practice and understanding of Tai Chi with internal exercises to develop concentration and focus. For students who have completed the beginners course. Who is this course for? This improvers course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have completed the Tai Chi Beginners course and been invited to attend by the course tutor. Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with limited mobility as they can sit down to do some of the exercises and movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. What will you learn on this course? Tai Chi is a Chinese exercise system and martial art. It has been called meditation in movement and people come to Tai Chi for a variety of reasons including relaxation and to improve their balance and health. There are different styles of Tai Chi. On this course you will learn the Chen Man Ching form (sequence of 37 moves) which was adapted from the Yang Form (108 moves) in order to meet the need of people in the West who had less time to commit to practice. It is very soft and less overtly martial than other styles. You will continue to learn Tai Chi stances and exercises and how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner. Most classes will start with loosening exercises, then you will learn a move or two from the Chen Man Ching form and the class will end with some Chi Gung breathing exercises. In addition you may also do some individual and partnered exercises including Tai Chi walking and push hands. As an improver you will use your developing knowledge and tutor feedback to ensure correct alignment in your stances. You will learn about external aspects of movement, position, angle, posture and timing. Your tutor will introduce the concept of internal discipline and teach you how to apply concentration and focus to the Tai Chi exercises. On completion of this course participants will have learnt the last two thirds of the Chen Man Ching form. The first third of the form is taught in the Beginners class. Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Phil Shelton

Wed 22 Jan
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 29 Jan
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 5 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 12 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 26 Feb
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 4 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 11 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 18 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 25 Mar
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Wed 1 Apr
Performance Studio

£89 (£82)

Talking Film (DM11 Spring)

Talk about films with other enthusiasts, watching and discussing clips of different films each week. Social cinema trips to mac’s cinema are included on this course. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. This course is aimed at people with an interest in film and going to the cinema. It’s for anyone who would like to learn a bit more about film making and be able to say more than “I liked it” or “I didn’t like it”. An opportunity to share your passion with other enthusiasts with built in social cinema evenings. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. What will you learn on this course? This course will give you the understanding and language you need to increase your vocabulary about film and how to communicate your opinions – a film appreciation tool kit. Through watching and analysing a variety of films and film clips you will develop the techniques of film criticism, being able to make informed judgements on the quality of many different aspects of film making. You will also learn about film genre’s and styles, structure, plot and character development, technical aspects such as cinematography and composition and how effective these are in progressing or hindering the narrative. Each termly course follows a theme such as British Film, European Film or Film Noir. The course is a mix of presentations and discussions led by the tutor and small group working, discussing and reflecting on films or clips that have been watched in class. The approach of this course is not academic but more influenced by the tutor’s experience as an award winning film maker. The course will include one free group visit to mac’s cinema to watch a film together. This may happen at a slightly different time or on a different day to fit with the cinema schedule. In addition each course participant will be able to buy standard cinema tickets at MAC for £5 each during the course term. On completing this course you can expect to have developed a wider and deeper understanding of film making and film culture. You will also be able to confidently express your thoughts and opinions on a film and tell someone why you liked it or not. Do you need to bring anything? Students should bring an usb stick or portable drive with plenty of storage in order to take their projects home. Mac cameras and computers are provided whilst on site only. If you wish to film off site you will need your own equipment. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Michael Clifford

Thu 23 Jan
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 30 Jan
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 6 Feb
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 13 Feb
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 27 Feb
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 5 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 12 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 19 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 26 Mar
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Thu 2 Apr
Pinsent Mason 1

£104 (£95)

Tap Dance Advanced (DA11 Spring)

Refine your tap dancing skills further and learn challenging routines. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. You should have strong previous tap dancing experience such as attending mac’s Tap Dance Improvers course or having completed upper Tap grades to a high-standard. You should be confident in all basic steps and have reasonable knowledge of more advanced skills such as American paddle steps. The course is accessible for people with disabilities providing you are physically able to dance to this level. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Tap dancing is a high impact physical activity, especially on the legs. You need a good level of physical fitness but the course is also a good way to maintain and improve your overall fitness levels. If you have any health conditions you should consult your doctor before joining this class. What will you learn on this course? This course will build on your existing tap dancing skills. You will learn more complex tap steps and combinations focusing on correct technique and polished presentation. Each class will provide a combination of strong physical dance warm ups, technical learning of steps and combining the skills you have learned into dance routines. The course also focuses on developing musicality and presentation techniques when you are dancing. The classes are taught through a combination of group teaching and supporting individual learning. Dance routines will be produced weekly and over longer periods. The routines taught on this course will be more complex and challenging. By the end of the course you will have learned several complete tap dance routines. mac has an excellent sprung floor dance studio with mirrors and a lovely view of the park. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring your own tap shoes. You should also bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the class. Are there any additional costs? You must supply your own tap shoes at your expense. These can be easily purchased online or from dance supply shops. Who teaches this course? Leah Ball

Tue 21 Jan
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 28 Jan
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 4 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 11 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 25 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 3 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 10 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 17 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 24 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 31 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tap Dance Beginners (DA04 Spring)

Learn to tap dance by combining basic steps and sequences into short dance routines. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners so you don’t need any previous tap dance experience as full instruction of the basics will be given. A great class for those just starting to tap or anyone who may not have danced for a long time. The course is accessible for people with disabilities providing you are physically able to dance. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Tap dancing is a high impact physical activity, especially on the legs. You need a good level of physical fitness but the course is also a good way to improve your overall fitness levels. If you have any health conditions you should consult your doctor before joining this class. What will you learn on this course? This course will introduce you to the basics of tap dancing. You will learn simple tap steps focusing on correct technique. Each class will provide a combination of strong physical dance warm ups, technical learning of steps and combining the skills you have learned into dance routines. The course also focuses on developing musicality and presentation techniques when you are dancing. This course is an excellent way to improve your general fitness levels and you should notice an increase in stamina and strength in your legs. You will also develop better co-ordination and improved musical awareness and rhythmic skills. The classes are taught through a combination of group teaching and supporting individual learning. Dance routines will be produced weekly and over longer periods. By the end of the course you will have learned several complete tap dance routines. mac has an excellent sprung floor dance studio with mirrors and a lovely view of the park. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring your own tap shoes. You should also bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the class. Are there any additional costs? You must supply your own tap shoes at your expense. These can be easily purchased online or from dance supply shops. Who teaches this course? Helen Mason

Tue 21 Jan
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 28 Jan
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 4 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 11 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 25 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 3 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 10 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 17 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 24 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 31 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tap Dance Improvers (DA10 Spring)

Develop your tap dancing skills further and learn more complicated routines. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to improvers. You should have previous tap dancing experience such as attending mac’s Tap Dance Beginners course or a similar beginners course elsewhere. You should be confident in all basic steps and be able to learn and perform dance routines. The course is accessible for people with disabilities providing you are physically able to dance. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Tap dancing is a high impact physical activity, especially on the legs. You need a good level of physical fitness but the course is also a good way to improve your overall fitness levels. If you have any health conditions you should consult your doctor before joining this class. What will you learn on this course? This course will build on your existing tap dancing skills. You will learn more complex tap steps focusing on correct technique. Each class will provide a combination of strong physical dance warm ups, technical learning of steps and combining the skills you have learned into dance routines. The course also focuses on developing musicality and presentation techniques when you are dancing. The classes are taught through a combination of group teaching and supporting individual learning. Dance routines will be produced weekly and over longer periods. The routines taught on this course will be more complex and challenging. By the end of the course you will have learned several complete tap dance routines. mac has an excellent sprung floor dance studio with mirrors and a lovely view of the park. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring your own tap shoes. You should also bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the class. Are there any additional costs? You must supply your own tap shoes at your expense. These can be easily purchased online or from dance supply shops. Who teaches this course? Helen Mason

Tue 21 Jan
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 28 Jan
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 4 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 11 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 25 Feb
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 3 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 10 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 17 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 24 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

Tue 31 Mar
English Studio

£108 (£99)

TDE Promotions Presents: Tom Rainey Trio

Tom Rainey has been a regular visitor to Birmingham with Tim Berne over the last 15 years or so. He returns with his own trio with Ingrid Laubrock on saxophones and Mary Halvorson on guitar - Mary is the most recent awardee of the McArthur Genius Award. This is New York music at its most creative. This is a TDE Promotion and also the opening concert of The IDEAS OF NOISE Festival

Thu 23 Jan

£10.50

Textile Design & Screenprinting with Dyes (TE23 Spring)

Explore the process of creating screenprint designs using stencil and direct application techniques, experimenting with print paste and thickened dyes to create your own unique textiles. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years and is open to beginners. You don’t need any previous experience of screenprinting as full instruction and guidance is given, however you should have a keen interest in drawing. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn various techniques for producing screen printed textile designs. This which include mark-making, image layering and patternmaking. You will learn how to translate drawings into designs for textile, developing skills in composition, scale, mark-making and repeat. You will be taught how to screen print and will have acquired a basic knowledge in various dyes and processes including: . Working with Manutex and Procion dyes Preparing fabric for printing Printing using stencils Creating repeat print textiles designs Experimenting with direct dye screen printing Curing your print designs. You should expect to increase your confidence in drawing and to gain an understanding of positive and negative imagery, and layering which forms the basis of print design. You will be able to produce more complex designs as the course progresses and will have the opportunity to apply your designs to products. Using a mix of group demonstrations, hand-outs and individual support the tutor will guide you through the process explaining the materials and teaching the screen printing techniques. You will receive individual support on your designs and how to realise your ideas as required. On completion of this course you can expect to leave with a selection of screen printed samples and fabric designs and a finished product. Do you need to bring anything? Bring in inspiring sources to work from such as sketchbooks, photographs and images. You should wear old clothes and bring an apron to work in. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Rosie Moss

Wed 22 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 29 Jan
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 5 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 12 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 26 Feb
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 4 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 11 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 18 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 25 Mar
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Wed 1 Apr
Textiles Studio

£152 (£138)

Textiles: Surface Decoration (TE07 Spring)

Create interesting textile surface decoration taking inspiration from flora, fauna and foliage including sea shells, flowers, seed heads, insects and more. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people who are both completely new to textiles and those who wish to learn new approaches to design and develop their skills further. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. Students can be accompanied by a carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. This course involves working at low tables and good dexterity is needed in your hands. What will you learn on this course? This course offers a practical introduction to textile surface decoration through an exploration of a particular theme. We will experiment with a wide variety of textile techniques and look at the work of past and present artists who have used the natural world to inspire their work including Georgia O’Keefe, William Morris, Cas Holmes, Michael Brennand-Wood, Monet and J M W Turner. The theme will run throughout the year but each term will concentrate on different techniques. Autumn term We will experiment with techniques to create new tactile fabrics using manipulation, heat steam wax or stitch. We will draw inspiration from the stylised enlarged flowers by Georgia O Keefe, Vincent van Gogh’s sunflowers or Kaffe Fassett’s cabbages. Participants will learn a variety of techniques including wet and dry felting, batik, foiling, weaving and working with fibres which respond to heat including Angelina fibres, tyvek and more. Spring Term We will create a selection of colourful printed fabric samples decorated with butterflies, bees, or botanical patterns using a wide variety of different techniques including screen, mono, lino, transfer and block printing. We will use die cutters and rubber stamps but also learn how to design and make individual hand cut resists to make our mark. Our prints can be embellished with hand embroidery machine stitching and free motion embroidery using dissolvable plastics and papers. Summer Term Inspired by the delights of the French Impressionist Claude Monet and his garden at Giverny, this term will include dyeing fabric and threads using natural sources including the sun, ice, plants, soil and rust. We will look at mixed media techniques to use for assembling our samples using contemporary patchwork and applique techniques. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring an A4 or larger ring bound sketchbook and/or plastic wallet to keep your samples in. All other materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? You will need to provide the items listed above at your own expense. Ring bound scrapbook approx. £8.50. Who teaches this course? Helen Lane

Wed 22 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 29 Jan
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 5 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 12 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 26 Feb
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 4 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 11 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 18 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 25 Mar
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Wed 1 Apr
Textiles Studio

£131 (£119)

Toddler Art (FA11 Spring)

Let your child set the pace as you explore sensory activities and crafts together to boost their imagination, and build social and practical skills.

What will you learn on this course?

This course provides a range of creative play based sessions designed to provide a friendly, relaxed but stimulating space for young children to investigate. Each week there is a carousel of sensory art and play activities designed to encourage your child’s development and fine motor skills.

This is an informal class with numerous activities set up around the room. You are encouraged to let your child set the pace and spend as much, or as little time as they wish at any particular activity. Your child will be invited to choose from a variety of art materials and activities. The activities will have a suggested outcome but will still be open ended and child-led according to preference, age and ability. There will also be ‘Small Worlds’ play, which will foster the imagination and use sensory foods to create rich play environments. While engaging in this creative play parents will be made aware of the key areas of learning and development that are being covered. Social skills, sharing, confidence building, fine motor skills, visual development, auditory stimulation, knowledge of materials and their uses and language development will all benefit.

All activities involve child friendly materials. This may include foodstuffs so the tutor should be informed of any allergies or religious needs.

Come and explore, play and interact with your child at their pace in a friendly space with other young families.

Any outcomes produced as a result of the child’s exploration e.g. painted paper, collage or models, can be taken home at the end of the session.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 2- 5 years accompanied by their families. It is open to all levels, those who have no experience of creative play and those who may have attended similar courses before.

The course is accessible for children of all abilities as we provide a learning support worker, parents or carers assist their children and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? Wipes and adult aprons are provided. Children must be dressed for messy play, preferably in old clothes. A change of clothes is advisable. All other materials and resources are provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Claire Leggett

Tue 21 Jan
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 28 Jan
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 4 Feb
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 11 Feb
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 25 Feb
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 3 Mar
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 17 Mar
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 24 Mar
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Tue 31 Mar
Weston Studio

£4 (Children £4–£24)

Watercolours (VA05 Spring)

An introduction to the materials and techniques required to produce exciting watercolours including drawing, composition and colour-mixing. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to watercolours or may not have worked in this medium for some time. You don’t need any previous painting experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. What will you learn on this course? This course provides an introduction to watercolour painting. You will learn about the materials required and a range of painting techniques to equip you with the skills to explore watercolour in your own style. The techniques covered on this course include: Wet-in-wet Masking Building layers of paint Wet-on-dry Texture Colour mixing Use of colour Colour theory Composition Drawing skills You will learn these techniques by painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and figures. New techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several watercolour paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in watercolour painting and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Watercolour paper is provided and also basic art materials may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. This would typically include watercolour paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Louise Blakeway

Tue 21 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 28 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 4 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 11 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 25 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 3 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 10 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 17 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 24 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Tue 31 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146.50 (£134.50)

Watercolours (VA83 Spring)

An introduction to the materials and techniques required to produce exciting watercolours including drawing, composition and colour-mixing.

What will you learn on this course?

This course provides an introduction to watercolour painting. You will learn about the materials required and a range of painting techniques to equip you with the skills to explore watercolour in your own style. The techniques covered on this course include:

Wet-in-wet Masking Building layers of paint Wet-on-dry Texture Colour mixing Use of colour Colour theory Composition Drawing skills

You will learn these techniques by painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and figures.

New techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work.

In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence.

On completion of this course students will usually have produced several watercolour paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in watercolour painting and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to watercolours or may not have worked in this medium for some time. You don’t need any previous painting experience as full instruction is given.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Watercolour paper is provided and also basic art materials may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint.

You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with.

Are there any additional costs?

As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. This would typically include watercolour paints, brushes and palettes.

Who teaches this course?

Louise Blakeway

Fri 24 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 31 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 7 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 14 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 28 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 6 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 13 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 20 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 27 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Fri 3 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£139 (£127)

Wheelwork (CE09 Spring)

Learn the basic techniques of throwing and turning forms on the potter’s wheel, an ancient tool which has been used to create objects of great beauty and practicality. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous clay work experience as full instruction and guidance is given. This course is ideal for those looking to try throwing pots on the potter’s wheel for the first time or improvers wishing to refine their skills and make new pieces of work. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but requires good manual dexterity and some physical strength and fitness. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. What will you learn on this course? The craft of ‘throwing’ pottery on a potter’s wheel probably originated at least five thousand years ago in the Middle East and is still the way pottery is made in many countries today. On this course you will learn this ancient skill. The course covers the basic techniques of throwing and turning forms on the potter’s wheel along with finishing techniques in decorating and glazing. In Britain, despite our rich ceramic heritage, pottery has become more a craft activity than a commercial production technique. The tradition of Bernard Leach and Michael Cardew has resulted in the survival of this craft as a strong element of the Craft community. In recent years it has provided a popular recreational activity for a growing number of people. The skills involved in throwing require some physical strength and fitness but also some determination and self-confidence, as the initial stages can be quite challenging to one’s self-esteem. Come along and find out what we mean. This course is perfect for those with an enthusiasm for design, aesthetic awareness and the production of useful items. You will explore a variety of styles of work from historical and contemporary examples. Your items require time to dry out before being fired in the kiln so please allow three weeks before they are ready for collection. Do you need to bring anything? Short sleeves and old trousers are recommended but clay washes off easily. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course prices includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? David Wicks

Fri 24 Jan
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 31 Jan
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 7 Feb
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 14 Feb
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 28 Feb
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 6 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 13 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 20 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 27 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 3 Apr
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wheelwork (CE10 Spring)

Learn the basic techniques of throwing and turning forms on the potter’s wheel, an ancient tool which has been used to create objects of great beauty and practicality. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous clay work experience as full instruction and guidance is given. This course is ideal for those looking to try throwing pots on the potter’s wheel for the first time or improvers wishing to refine their skills and make new pieces of work. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but requires good manual dexterity and some physical strength and fitness. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. What will you learn on this course? The craft of ‘throwing’ pottery on a potter’s wheel probably originated at least five thousand years ago in the Middle East and is still the way pottery is made in many countries today. On this course you will learn this ancient skill. The course covers the basic techniques of throwing and turning forms on the potter’s wheel along with finishing techniques in decorating and glazing. In Britain, despite our rich ceramic heritage, pottery has become more a craft activity than a commercial production technique. The tradition of Bernard Leach and Michael Cardew has resulted in the survival of this craft as a strong element of the Craft community. In recent years it has provided a popular recreational activity for a growing number of people. The skills involved in throwing require some physical strength and fitness but also some determination and self-confidence, as the initial stages can be quite challenging to one’s self-esteem. Come along and find out what we mean. This course is perfect for those with an enthusiasm for design, aesthetic awareness and the production of useful items. You will explore a variety of styles of work from historical and contemporary examples. Your items require time to dry out before being fired in the kiln so please allow three weeks before they are ready for collection. Do you need to bring anything? Short sleeves and old trousers are recommended but clay washes off easily. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course prices includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? David Wicks

Fri 24 Jan
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 31 Jan
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 7 Feb
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 14 Feb
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 28 Feb
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 6 Mar
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 13 Mar
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 20 Mar
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 27 Mar
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Fri 3 Apr
Pottery Studio

£185.50 (£169.50)

Wheelwork for Beginners (CE103 Spring)

In this friendly atmosphere in Mac’s ceramic studio you will learn a series of basic techniques in the art of wheel throwing such as clay preparation to creating cylinders & bowls and then progressing to other forms followed by glazing and firing your work. Who is this course for? The course is aimed at beginners aged 18+ years. You don’t need any previous experience of wheel throwing as full guidance will be given through all the stages starting from taking a ball of clay and transforming it to a beautiful form. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but requires good manual dexterity and some physical strength and fitness. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. What will you learn on this course? On this course the tutor will demonstrate the key stages of wheel throwing and with your determination and enthusiasm you will create pieces with great satisfaction. Your initial learning will begin with the foundation of two main forms; the cylinder and the bowl. Most other forms can be learnt from those two forms. Another technique you will apply to your work is turning. We will be looking at producing both functional and also welcoming you to opening the doors to creating non-functional pieces that could possibly be used for more aesthetic reasons. After completing a piece you will be introduced to surface decoration with the use of various glaze colours which will then go on to be fired in the kiln. Throughout the weeks you will gain both wheel throwing and general ceramic knowledge. Do you need to bring anything? Short sleeves and old trousers are recommended but clay washes off easily. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Serge Sanghera

Fri 24 Jan
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 31 Jan
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 7 Feb
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 14 Feb
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 28 Feb
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 6 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 13 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 20 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 27 Mar
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Fri 3 Apr
Pottery Studio

£178 (£162)

Writing Children's Literature Improvers (WR104 Spring)

Advance your writing, re-drafting and editing skills whilst gaining an understanding of how to become your own self-critic for continued development.

In these sessions you will be looking at writing in all the very different age ranges in children's writing, you will be attempting to write for these different categories and also learning some tips and techniques all writers need to improve their writing and make their own the best it can be.

What will you learn on this course? The course will bring some fun into creative writing and provide techniques for writing for children and techniques to improve creative writing. Carol’s approach is about building confidence and finding enjoyment as well as embracing the drafting process. You will be encouraged to develop techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

Who is this course for? This course is aimed at adults who would like to enhance their skills in the art of writing for children, build their confidence and improve their creative writing skills. The course is accessible for all abilities, however we suggest speaking to us if you have a disability that may impact on writing. Carers may attend a course to provide support but must book a complimentary ticket if attending. The room is wheelchair accessible. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a note book and pen Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Thu 23 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 30 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 6 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 13 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 27 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 5 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 12 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 19 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 26 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Thu 2 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Writing Children's Literature (WR102 Spring)

Do you want to write for children? Have you written some already, but would like some extra guidance and tips? Or would you like to have a go? In these sessions you will be looking at writing in all the very different age ranges in children's writing, you will be attempting to write for these different categories and also learning some tips and techniques all writers need to improve their writing and make their own the best it can be. If any of the above applies to you, don't hold back, come and give these classes a go. What have you got to lose? Who is this course for? This course is aimed at adults who would like to learn the art of writing for children, build their confidence and improve their creative writing skills. The course is accessible for all abilities, however we suggest speaking to us if the person has a disability that may impact on writing. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. What will you learn on this course? The course will bring some fun into creative writing and provide techniques for writing for children and techniques to improve creative writing. Carol’s approach is about building confidence and finding enjoyment as well as embracing the drafting process. You will be encouraged to develop techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a note book and pen Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 20 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 27 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 3 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 10 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 24 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 2 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 9 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 16 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 23 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Mon 30 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£90 (£82)

Yang Tai Chi Advanced (WB04 Spring)

An advanced course for students with several years’ experience wishing to refine and deepen their practice.

What will you learn on this course?

Yang Tai Chi is a smooth, gentle exercise coordinating calm breathing movements and inner concentration. This is a low–impact mind–body series of movements from traditional Chinese arts to aid the balance of health and to support longevity.

You will learn relaxation techniques to keep fit and improve your well–being including Qigong exercises that combine breathing with movements. You will also learn the Yang 42 step Tai Chi form. This is a sequence of movements originating from the Yang family style.

The tutor demonstrates and explains the movements to the class and you will learn how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner.

Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture
Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength On completion of this course you will have learned the Yang 42 step form and be able to practice Tai Chi independently.

Who is this course for?

This advanced course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have completed the Yang Tai Chi Improvers course and been invited to attend this class by the tutor. If you have learnt elsewhere and have practiced for at least 4-5 years you may be able to join this class following an assessment by the tutor. Please contact us if you wish to arrange an assessment.

Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. Carers may assist. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

If you have any existing health problems please check with your GP before beginning this course.

Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement and flat shoes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Yanyan Yang

Thu 23 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 30 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 6 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 13 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 27 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 5 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 12 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 19 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 26 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 2 Apr
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Yang Tai Chi Beginners (WB20 Spring)

This ancient Chinese art combines movement, breath and concentration to improve your health and help you live longer. This class is for new students and those with less than two years’ experience.

What will you learn on this course?

Yang Tai Chi is a smooth, gentle exercise coordinating calm breathing movements and inner concentration. This is a low–impact mind–body series of movements from traditional Chinese arts to aid the balance of health and to support longevity.

You will learn relaxation techniques to keep fit and improve your well–being including Qigong exercises that combine breathing with movements. You will also learn the Yang 24 step Tai Chi form. This is a sequence of movements originating from the Yang family style.

The tutor demonstrates and explains the movements to the class and you will learn how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner.

Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture
Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength On completion of this course you will have started to learn the Yang 24 step form and be able to practice Tai Chi independently.

Who is this course for?

This beginners course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have no prior experience of Tai Chi or anyone who hasn’t undertaken Tai Chi for a number of years.

Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. Carers may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

If you have any existing health problems please check with your GP before beginning this course. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement and flat shoes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Yanyan Yang

Sat 25 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 1 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 8 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 15 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 29 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 7 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 14 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 21 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 28 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 4 Apr
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Yang Tai Chi Beginners (WB88 Spring)

This ancient Chinese art combines movement, breath and concentration to improve your health and help you live longer. This class is for new students and those with less than two years’ experience.

What will you learn on this course?

Yang Tai Chi is a smooth, gentle exercise coordinating calm breathing movements and inner concentration. This is a low–impact mind–body series of movements from traditional Chinese arts to aid the balance of health and to support longevity.

You will learn relaxation techniques to keep fit and improve your well–being including Qigong exercises that combine breathing with movements. You will also learn the Yang 24 step Tai Chi form. This is a sequence of movements originating from the Yang family style.

The tutor demonstrates and explains the movements to the class and you will learn how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner.

Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture
Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength On completion of this course you will have started to learn the Yang 24 step form and be able to practice Tai Chi independently.

Who is this course for?

This beginners course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have no prior experience of Tai Chi or anyone who hasn’t undertaken Tai Chi for a number of years.

Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. Carers may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

If you have any existing health problems please check with your GP before beginning this course. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement and flat shoes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Yanyan Yang

Thu 23 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 30 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 6 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 13 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 27 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 5 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 12 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 19 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 26 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 2 Apr
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Yang Tai Chi - Improvers 1 (WB102 Spring)

An enhanced improvers course for students with a couple of years’ experience wishing to learn the Yang 24 step form and deepen their practice.

What will you learn on this course?

Yang Tai Chi is a smooth, gentle exercise coordinating calm breathing movements and inner concentration. This is a low–impact mind–body series of movements from traditional Chinese arts to aid the balance of health and to support longevity.

You will learn relaxation techniques to keep fit and improve your well–being including Qigong exercises that combine breathing with movements. You will also continue to learn the Yang 24 step Tai Chi form. This is a sequence of movements originating from the Yang family style.

The tutor demonstrates and explains the movements to the class and you will learn how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner.

Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture
Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength On completion of this course you will have learned the Yang 24 step form and be able to practice Tai Chi independently.

Who is this course for?

This improvers course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have completed the Yang Tai Chi Beginners course and Improvers course and been invited to attend this class by the tutor. If you have learnt elsewhere and have practiced for 2-3 years you may be able to join this class following an assessment by the tutor. Please contact us if you wish to arrange an assessment.

Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. Carers may assist. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

If you have any existing health problems please check with your GP before beginning this course. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement and flat shoes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Yanyan Yang

Thu 23 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 30 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 6 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 13 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 27 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 5 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 12 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 19 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 26 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 2 Apr
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Yang Tai Chi Improvers (WB25 Spring)

An improvers course for students with a couple of years’ experience wishing to learn the Yang 24 step form and deepen their practice.

What will you learn on this course?

Yang Tai Chi is a smooth, gentle exercise coordinating calm breathing movements and inner concentration. This is a low–impact mind–body series of movements from traditional Chinese arts to aid the balance of health and to support longevity.

You will learn relaxation techniques to keep fit and improve your well–being including Qigong exercises that combine breathing with movements. You will also continue to learn the Yang 24 step Tai Chi form. This is a sequence of movements originating from the Yang family style.

The tutor demonstrates and explains the movements to the class and you will learn how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner.

Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture
Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength On completion of this course you will have learned the Yang 24 step form and be able to practice Tai Chi independently.

Who is this course for?

This improvers course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have completed the Yang Tai Chi Beginners course and been invited to attend this class by the tutor. If you have learnt elsewhere and have practiced for 2-3 years you may be able to join this class following an assessment by the tutor. Please contact us if you wish to arrange an assessment.

Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. Carers may assist. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

If you have any existing health problems please check with your GP before beginning this course. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement and flat shoes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Yanyan Yang

Sat 25 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 1 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 8 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 15 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 29 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 7 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 14 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 21 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 28 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Sat 4 Apr
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Yang Tai Chi Improvers (WB96 Spring)

An improvers course for students with a couple of years’ experience wishing to learn the Yang 24 step form and deepen their practice.

What will you learn on this course?

Yang Tai Chi is a smooth, gentle exercise coordinating calm breathing movements and inner concentration. This is a low–impact mind–body series of movements from traditional Chinese arts to aid the balance of health and to support longevity.

You will learn relaxation techniques to keep fit and improve your well–being including Qigong exercises that combine breathing with movements. You will also continue to learn the Yang 24 step Tai Chi form. This is a sequence of movements originating from the Yang family style.

The tutor demonstrates and explains the movements to the class and you will learn how to practice these using safe and effective posture and technique and in a relaxed manner.

Tai Chi has a number of health benefits including improved: Flexibility Posture
Co-ordination Stamina or cardiovascular health Balance Blood pressure levels Body awareness Use of intrinsic strength On completion of this course you will have learned the Yang 24 step form and be able to practice Tai Chi independently.

Who is this course for?

This improvers course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for those who have completed the Yang Tai Chi Beginners course and been invited to attend this class by the tutor. If you have learnt elsewhere and have practiced for 2-3 years you may be able to join this class following an assessment by the tutor. Please contact us if you wish to arrange an assessment.

Tai Chi is a low impact form of exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as movements are undertaken within the comfort, capability range and limitations of each individual’s body. Carers may assist. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

If you have any existing health problems please check with your GP before beginning this course. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement and flat shoes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Yanyan Yang

Thu 23 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 30 Jan
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 6 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 13 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 27 Feb
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 5 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 12 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 19 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 26 Mar
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Thu 2 Apr
English Studio

£107 (£98)

Young Filmmakers Club With Reel Access (YP07 Spring)

If you're aged 11-18 with a passion for film, drama and digital media then the Young Filmmakers Club could be for you. Join the Young Filmmakers Club to develop new skills in filmmaking and acting for screen and to pursue your own exciting, creative ideas.

What will you learn on this course?

This course will give you an insight into the process, techniques and skills involved in making a film. Each term the content and structure of the course is decided by the group which sees students generating an idea together or working with a member’s idea for a group project film. Alternatively you may work in smaller groups on new ideas or those brought by a number of members. During the course you will have the option to work as a writer, actor, director and crew member learning a range of film making skills. The tutor will guide the group through the entire process from the initial generation of ideas generation to shooting and editing. There will be a special screening of the work produced on the course in Mac’s hexagon theatre or cinema for invited family and friends.

Anyone who attends this course will have automatic membership to the Interfilm Film Club which encourages young people to write reviews of current films. This is a great opportunity for reviewers to enter prize draws which has led to previous students winning DVDs and other film goodies.

Who is this course for?

This course is open to young people aged 11-18 years old of any experience level.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities. We provide a learning support worker or students may be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. The room is wheelchair accessible. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? All equipment and materials are provided. For films with ambitious needs, students will take part in enlisting additional support. Are there any additional costs? No additional costs unless there are specific resources that students wish to have for themselves. Who teaches this course? Reel Access (Keith Bloomfield, Martin McNally, Laura Breakwell, George Fleming) Working in partnership with Reel Access www.reelaccess.org.uk

Wed 22 Jan
Media Studio
Wed 29 Jan
Media Studio
Wed 5 Feb
Media Studio
Wed 12 Feb
Media Studio
Wed 26 Feb
Media Studio
Wed 4 Mar
Media Studio
Wed 11 Mar
Media Studio
Wed 18 Mar
Media Studio
Wed 25 Mar
Media Studio
Wed 1 Apr
Media Studio

Re-opened in 2010 after a £15.2 million refit, with greater access and greener facilities.

Tell us more about this venue.